Nokia Solutions and Networks T5CR1 48V SC4812T 800 MHz CDMA BTS Frame User Manual Exhibit

Nokia Solutions and Networks 48V SC4812T 800 MHz CDMA BTS Frame Users Manual Exhibit

Users Manual Exhibit

Download: Nokia Solutions and Networks T5CR1 48V SC4812T 800 MHz CDMA BTS Frame User Manual Exhibit
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]Nokia Solutions and Networks T5CR1 48V SC4812T 800 MHz CDMA BTS Frame User Manual Exhibit
Document ID276585
Application IDlVNH7QW2CsMXYoBLCVgHdw==
Document DescriptionUsers Manual Exhibit
Short Term ConfidentialNo
Permanent ConfidentialNo
SupercedeNo
Document TypeUser Manual
Display FormatAdobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize303.6kB (3795002 bits)
Date Submitted2002-10-14 00:00:00
Date Available2002-12-11 00:00:00
Creation Date2002-08-23 10:04:51
Producing SoftwareAcrobat Distiller 4.05 for Windows
Document Lastmod2002-09-30 21:48:28
Document TitleUsers Manual Exhibit

1X SCt 4812T BTS
Optimization/ATP
Software Release 2.16.1.x
800, 1700, and 1900 MHz
CDMA
English
Aug 2002
68P09255A61- 4
FIELD TRIAL
Notice
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola, Inc. assumes no liability resulting
from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information obtained herein. The information in this
document has been carefully checked and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for
inaccuracies or omissions. Motorola, Inc. reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein and reserves the
right to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person
of revisions or changes. Motorola, Inc. does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product,
software, or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patent rights or the rights of others.
It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or information about Motorola products (machines and
programs), programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not be
construed to mean that Motorola intends to announce such Motorola products, programming, or services in your country.
Copyrights
This instruction manual, and the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may be, include or describe
copyrighted Motorola material, such as computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in
the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material, including
the exclusive right to copy, reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material.
Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola material contained herein or in the Motorola products described in this
instruction manual may not be copied, reproduced, distributed, merged or modified in any manner without the express
written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either
directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of
Motorola, as arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.
Usage and Disclosure Restrictions
License Agreement
The software described in this document is the property of Motorola, Inc. It is furnished by express license agreement
only and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement.
Copyrighted Materials
Software and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of the
software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any
language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola, Inc.
High Risk Activities
Components, units, or third-party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault-tolerant and are NOT
designed, manufactured, or intended for use as on-line control equipment in the following hazardous environments
requiring fail-safe controls: the operation of Nuclear Facilities, Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft Communication Systems,
Air Traffic Control, Life Support, or Weapons Systems (“High Risk Activities”). Motorola and its supplier(s) specifically
disclaim any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for such High Risk Activities.
Trademarks
and Motorola are registered trademarks of Motorola, Inc.
Product and service names profiled herein are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. Other manufacturers’ products or services
profiled herein may be referred to by trademarks of their respective companies.
Copyright
 Copyright 2002 Motorola, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
Printed on
Recyclable Paper
REV012501
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
1X SCt 4812T BTS
Optimization/ATP
Table of Contents
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Table of Contents
68P09255A61-4
Contents
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvi
General Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xix
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxi
Patent Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxii
Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
Optimization Manual: Scope and Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scope of This Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Document Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CDMA LMF Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-3
Purpose of the Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why Optimize? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Is Optimization? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When to Optimize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-5
Abbreviations and Acronyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Abbreviations and Acronyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6
1-6
Required Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Cable Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Warm-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LMF Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-9
1-9
1-9
1-12
Required Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intended Reader Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-14
1-14
1-14
BTS Equipment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ancillary Equipment Frame Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logical BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS Frame Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-15
1-15
1-15
1-15
1-21
Frame Module Location & Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sector Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-23
1-30
Chapter 2 Preliminary Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Preliminary Operations: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cell Site Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Equipage Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Installation of Boards/Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Frame C-CCP Shelf Configuration Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-3
Pre-Power-up Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-4
ii
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Table of Contents
68P09255A61-4
DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power Pre-test (RFDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
2-11
Initial Power-up Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power-up Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Power Supply Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Power-up (RFDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Power-up (BTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-12
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-14
Chapter 3 Optimization/Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
Optimization/Calibration - Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimization Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cell Site Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cell-Site Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS System Software Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Equipage Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-3
Isolate Span Lines/Connect LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LMF to BTS Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
3-4
3-5
Preparing the LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LMF Operating System Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy CDF Files from CBSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folder Structure Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pinging the Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7
3-7
3-8
3-8
3-10
3-12
3-13
Using CDMA LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic LMF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graphical User Interface Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Line Interface Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logging into a BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logging Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Establishing an MMI Communication Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-16
3-16
3-16
3-17
3-18
3-21
3-23
Download the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download the BTS - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download Code to Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download Code and Data to Non-MGLI Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select CSM Clock Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enable CSMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enable MCCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enable Redundant GLIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-24
3-24
3-25
3-26
3-27
3-28
3-30
3-30
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM & LFR Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Frequency Receiver/
High Stability Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM Frequency Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Null Modem Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Setup: GPS & LFR/HSO Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS Initialization/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LFR Initialization/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HSO Initialization/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-31
3-31
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-32
3-32
3-33
3-33
3-33
3-35
3-39
3-41
iii
Table of Contents
68P09255A61-4
Test Equipment Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Test Equipment to the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supported Test Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Reference Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Warm-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup for TX Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup for Optimization/ATP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX ATP Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-43
3-43
3-43
3-45
3-47
3-47
3-49
3-52
3-55
Test Set Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Set Calibration Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose of Test Set Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester Self-alignment (Calibration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Cables with a CDMA Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating TX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Cable Loss Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Coupler Loss Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-57
3-57
3-57
3-57
3-58
3-59
3-60
3-61
3-62
3-62
3-63
3-64
3-66
3-67
Bay Level Offset Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction to Bay Level Offset Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF Path Bay Level Offset Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When to Calibrate BLOs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Path Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BLO Calibration Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Setup: RF Path Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Path Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download BLO Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Audit Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Path Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Audit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All Cal/Audit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create CAL File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-68
3-68
3-68
3-68
3-69
3-69
3-72
3-72
3-75
3-76
3-76
3-76
3-77
3-79
RFDS Set-up and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS TSU NAM Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Explanation of Parameters used when Programming the TSU NAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Valid NAM Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Antenna Map Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set RFDS Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program TSU NAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-80
3-80
3-81
3-83
3-83
3-84
3-84
3-85
3-86
3-87
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundancy/Alarm Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-88
3-88
3-88
3-88
3-89
3-89
iv
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Table of Contents
68P09255A61-4
Miscellaneous Alarm/Redundancy Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BBX Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO Redundancy/Alarm Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA Redundancy Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MGLI/GLI Redundancy Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-91
3-93
3-94
3-97
3-98
BTS Alarms Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Test Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Reporting Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CDI Alarm Input Verification with Alarms Test Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CDI Alarm Input Verification without Alarms Test Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pin and Signal Information for Alarm Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-99
3-99
3-99
3-100
3-100
3-101
3-103
3-104
Chapter 4 Automated Acceptance Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures - All-inclusive TX & RX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reduced ATP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATP Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATP Test Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX OUT Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATP Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-3
4-4
TX Output Acceptance Tests: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Individual Acceptance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6
4-6
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tx Mask Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7
4-7
TX Waveform Quality (rho) Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rho Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9
4-9
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pilot Offset Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10
4-10
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Code Domain Power Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11
4-11
RX Frame Error Rate (FER) Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FER Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
4-13
Generate an ATP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-14
4-14
4-14
Chapter 5 Prepare to Leave the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
Prepare to Leave the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Test Equipment Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset All Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Re-connect BTS T1 Spans and Integrated Frame Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS Site Span Configuration Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set BTS Site Span Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Updating CBSC LMF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LMF Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Re-establish OMC-R Control/ Verifying T1/E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 6 Basic Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Troubleshooting Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
5-1
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-7
5-8
5-9
6-1
6-1
Table of Contents
68P09255A61-4
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
Troubleshooting: Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Log into Cell-Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Communicate to Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Communicate to Communications Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
6-2
6-2
6-3
Troubleshooting: Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Download CODE to Any Device (card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot ENABLE Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
6-4
6-4
6-5
6-5
Troubleshooting: Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bay Level Offset Calibration Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Load BLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Audit Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6
6-6
6-7
6-7
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS passed Reduced ATP tests but has forward link problem during normal operation . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform TX Mask Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform Carrier Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8
6-8
6-8
6-8
6-9
6-9
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-FER Test Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10
6-10
Troubleshooting: CSM Check-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problem Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock/GPS Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
No GPS Reference Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checksum Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS Bad RX Message Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM Reference Source Configuration Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11
6-11
6-11
6-11
6-11
6-11
6-11
6-12
C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Control Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX and RX Signal Routing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13
6-13
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-18
6-19
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Status Combinations for All Modules (except GLI, CSM, BBX, MCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLI2 LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLI2 Pushbuttons and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLI3 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BBX LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCC LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-20
6-20
6-20
6-20
6-21
6-22
6-23
6-25
6-26
6-26
6-27
Basic Troubleshooting - Span Control Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Span Problems (No Control Link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set BTS Site Span Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-28
6-28
6-30
vi
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Table of Contents
68P09255A61-4
Appendix A Data Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verification of Test Equipment Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preliminary Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pre-Power and Initial Power Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Optimization Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LFR Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA IM Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA Convergence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX BLO/Power Output Verification for 3-Sector Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX BLO/Power Output Verification for 6-Sector Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RX Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AMR Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
A-1
A-2
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-5
A-6
A-7
A-8
A-9
A-14
A-16
A-16
A-17
A-17
Site Serial Number Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-CCP Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Conversion Shelf (-48 V BTS Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-18
A-18
A-19
A-19
Appendix B PN Offset/I & Q Offset Register Programming Information . . . . . . . .
B-1
PN Offset Programming Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN Offset Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN Offset Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix C FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usage & Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix D BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
B-1
B-1
C-1
C-1
C-1
C-2
D-1
BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usage & Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-1
D-1
Appendix E CDMA Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-1
Operating Frequency - North American PCS Bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1900 MHz PCS Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating 1900 MHz Center Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
800 MHz CDMA Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating 800 MHz Center Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-1
E-1
E-1
E-2
E-4
E-4
Operating Frequency - Korean Bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1700 MHz PCS Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating 1700 MHz Center Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-6
E-6
E-7
Appendix F PCS Interface Setup for Manual Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-1
Test Equipment Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Warm up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
F-1
F-1
F-1
vii
Table of Contents
68P09255A61-4
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP8921A System Connectivity Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Cable Calibration using HP8921 with HP PCS Interface (HP83236) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP PCS Interface Test Equipment Setup for Manual Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Test Cable Setup using Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix G VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-1
F-2
F-3
F-7
F-8
G-1
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Setup - HP Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Setup - Advantest Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-1
G-1
G-1
G-2
G-4
Appendix H Download ROM Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-1
Download ROM Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download ROM Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-1
H-1
Appendix I In-Service Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Warm up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-1
I-1
I-1
Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Delta Calibration Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP8921A Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3465 Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP8935 Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-2
I-2
I-2
I-4
I-7
I-9
In-Service Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In-Service Calibration Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-12
I-12
Appendix J GPIB Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-1
GPIB Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP437 Power Meter GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP8935 Test Set GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3465 GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS232 GPIB Interface Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-1
J-1
J-1
J-2
J-3
J-4
J-5
J-7
J-8
CDMA 2000 Test Equipment Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3562 Signal Generator GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agilent E4432B Signal Generator GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-9
J-9
J-10
J-11
J-12
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Index-1
Aug 2002
Table of Contents
68P09255A61-4
List of Figures
Figure 1-1: Null Modem Cable Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-10
Figure 1-2: +27 V SC 4812T BTS Starter Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-17
Figure 1-3: -48 V SC 4812T BTS Starter Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-18
Figure 1-4: +27 V SC 4812T BTS Expansion Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-19
Figure 1-5: -48 V SC 4812T BTS Expansion Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-20
Figure 1-6: +27 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-23
Figure 1-7: -48 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-24
Figure 1-8: +27 V SC 4812T Expansion Frame I/O Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-25
Figure 1-9: -48 V SC 4812T Expansion Frame I/O Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-26
Figure 1-10: SC 4812T C-CCP Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-27
Figure 1-11: +27 V SC 4812T LPA Configuration - 4 Carrier with 2:1 Combiners . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-28
Figure 1-12: -48 V SC 4812T LPA Configuration - 4 Carrier, 3-Sector with 2:1 Combiners . . . . .
1-29
Figure 1-13: +27 V SC4812T LPA Configuration with Combiners/Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-32
Figure 1-14: -48 V SC4812T LPA Configuration with Combiners/Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-33
Figure 1-15: -48 V BTS Power Conversion Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-34
Figure 1-16: CDMA (COBRA) RFDS Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-35
Figure 2-1: Switch Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
Figure 2-2: Backplane DIP Switch Settings - SC 4812T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
Figure 2-3: +27 V BTS DC Distribution Pre-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
Figure 2-4: +27 V SC 4812T BTS Starter Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-8
Figure 2-5: -48 V BTS DC Distribution Pre-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-9
Figure 2-6: -48 V SC 4812T BTS Starter Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-10
Figure 2-7: DC Distribution Pre-test (COBRA RFDS Detail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-11
Figure 3-1: Span I/O Board T1 Span Isolation??? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
Figure 3-2: LMF Connection Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
Figure 3-3: LMF Folder Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12
Figure 3-4: BTS LAN Interconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-13
Figure 3-5: +27 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-14
Figure 3-6: -48 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-15
Figure 3-7: CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-23
Figure 3-8: Null Modem Cable Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-33
Figure 3-9: CSM MMI terminal connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-34
Figure 3-10: Cable Calibration Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-48
Figure 3-11: Cable Calibration Test Setup (Advantest R3267, Agilent E4406A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-49
Figure 3-12: TX Calibration Test Setup (CyberTest, HP 8935, and Advantest) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-50
Figure 3-13: TX Calibration Test Setup (Advantest R3267, Agilent E4406A, and HP8935) . . . . . .
3-51
Figure 3-14: Opt/ATP Test Setup Calibration (HP 8935) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-52
Figure 3-15: Opt/ATP Test Setup (HP 8921A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-53
Figure 3-16: Opt/ATP Test Setup (Advantest R3267 and Agilent E4406A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-54
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
ix
Table of Contents
68P09255A61-4
Figure 3-17: Typical TX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-55
Figure 3-18: Typical RX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-56
Figure 3-19: Agilent E4406A Self-alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-61
Figure 3-20: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX BLO and TX ATP Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-64
Figure 3-21: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-65
Figure 3-22: SC 4812T C-CCP Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-90
Figure 3-23: -48 V BTS Power Conversion Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-91
Figure 3-24: +27 V BTS C-CCP Fan Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-92
Figure 3-25: -48 V BTS C-CCP and Power Conversion Shelf Fan Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-93
Figure 3-26: +27 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-96
Figure 3-27: Alarm Connector Location and Connector Pin Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-100
Figure 3-28: AMR Connector Pin Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-101
Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8
Figure 4-2: Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12
Figure 5-1: Site and Span I/O Boards T1 Span Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
Figure 5-2: MGLI2/GLI2 MMI Port Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5
Figure 6-1: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-21
Figure 6-2: GLI2 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-24
Figure 6-3: GLI3 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-25
Figure 6-4: MCC Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-27
Figure 6-5: MGLI/GLI Board MMI Connection Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-29
Figure E-1: North American PCS 1900 MHz Frequency Spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-1
Figure E-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-4
Figure E-3: 1700 MHz PCS Frequency Spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-6
Figure F-1: Calibrating Test Setup Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-6
Figure F-2: Cable Calibration using Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-10
Figure G-1: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using HP8921 Test Set (1700/1900 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-3
Figure G-2: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using HP8921 Test Set (800 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-4
Figure G-3: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-6
Figure I-1: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8921A to HP437B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-3
Figure I-2: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8921A to HP8921A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-4
Figure I-3: Delta Calibration Setup - R3561L to HP437B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-6
Figure I-4: Delta Calibration Setup - R3561L to R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-6
Figure I-5: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8935 to HP437B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-8
Figure I-6: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8935 to HP8935 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-8
Figure I-7: Delta Calibration Setup - Agilent E4432B to HP437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-11
Figure I-8: Delta Calibration Setup - Agilent E4432B to Agilent E4406A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-11
Figure I-9: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-13
Figure I-10: IS-95 A/B/C Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-14
Figure J-1: HP437 Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-1
Figure J-2: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-2
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Table of Contents
68P09255A61-4
Figure J-3: HP8935 Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-4
Figure J-4: HP8921A and HP83236A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-6
Figure J-5: R3465 Communications Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-7
Figure J-6: RS232 GPIB Interface Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-8
Figure J-7: Setting Advantest R3267 GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-10
Figure J-8: Advantest R3562 GPIB Address Switch Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-10
Figure J-9: Setting Agilent E4406A GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-12
Figure J-10: Setting Agilent E4432B GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-13
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
xi
Table of Contents
68P09255A61-4
List of Tables
xii
Table 1-1: Abbreviations and Acronyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6
Table 1-2: C-CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Top Shelf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-16
Table 1-3: C-CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-16
Table 1-4: BTS Sector Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-30
Table 1-5: Sector Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-31
Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
Table 2-2: DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
Table 2-3: DC Power Pre-test (RFDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-11
Table 2-4: DC Input Power Cable Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-12
Table 2-5: Common Power Supply Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-13
Table 2-6: Initial Power-up (RFDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-14
Table 2-7: Initial Power-up (BTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-14
Table 3-1: T1/E1 Span Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
Table 3-2: LMF to BTS Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
Table 3-3: LMF Operating System Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8
Table 3-4: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9
Table 3-5: Creating a Named Hyperlink Connection for MMI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11
Table 3-6: Pinging the Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-14
Table 3-7: BTS GUI Login Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-18
Table 3-8: BTS CLI Login Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-20
Table 3-9: BTS GUI Logout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21
Table 3-10: BTS CLI Logout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-22
Table 3-11: Establishing MMI Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-23
Table 3-12: Download and Enable MGLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-25
Table 3-13: Download Code and Data to Non-MGLI Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-26
Table 3-14: Select CSM Clock Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-27
Table 3-15: Enable CSMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-29
Table 3-16: Enable MCCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-30
Table 3-17: Enable Redundant GLIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-30
Table 3-18: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-33
Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-36
Table 3-20: LFR Initialization/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-40
Table 3-21: HSO Initialization/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-42
Table 3-23: IS-95 A/B/C Test Equipment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-46
Table 3-24: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-58
Table 3-25: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-59
Table 3-26: Test Equipment Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-60
Table 3-27: Agilent E4406A Self-alignment (Calibration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-61
Table 3-28: Cable Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-63
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Table of Contents
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-29: Calibrating TX Cables Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-63
Table 3-30: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . .
3-64
Table 3-31: Setting Cable Loss Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-66
Table 3-32: Setting Coupler Loss Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-67
Table 3-33: BLO BTS.cal File Array Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-70
Table 3-34: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-70
Table 3-35: Test Equipment Setup (RF Path Calibration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-72
Table 3-36: BTS TX Path Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-74
Table 3-37: Download BLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-75
Table 3-38: BTS TX Path Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-77
Table 3-39: All Cal/Audit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-78
Table 3-40: Create CAL File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-79
Table 3-41: RFDS Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-82
Table 3-42: Definition of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-83
Table 3-43: Valid NAM Field Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-84
Table 3-44: Set Antenna Map Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-84
Table 3-45: Set RFDS Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-85
Table 3-46: RFDS Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-86
Table 3-47: Program the TSU NAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-87
Table 3-48: Test Equipment Setup for Redundancy/Alarm Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-89
Table 3-49: Power Supply/Converter Redundancy (BTS Frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-89
Table 3-50: Miscellaneous Alarm Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-91
Table 3-51: BBX Redundancy Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-93
Table 3-52: CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO, Redundancy/Alarm Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-94
Table 3-53: LPA Redundancy Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-97
Table 3-54: MGLI/GLI Redundancy Test (with MM Connection Established) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-98
Table 3-55: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-101
Table 3-56: CDI Alarm Input Verification Without the Alarms Test Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-103
Table 3-57: Pin and Signal Information for Alarm Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-104
Table 4-1: ATP Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4
Table 4-2: Generating an ATP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-14
Table 5-1: External Test Equipment Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
Table 5-2: Enabling Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
Table 5-3: T1/E1 Span/IFM Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
Table 5-4: BTS Span Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4
Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5
Table 5-6: Backup CAL Data to a Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7
Table 5-7: LMF Termination and Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8
Table 5-8: Procedures to Copy CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8
Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
xiii
Table of Contents
xiv
68P09255A61-4
Table 6-3: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
Table 6-5: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5
Table 6-7: Miscellaneous Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5
Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6
Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7
Table 6-10: Troubleshooting Forward Link Failure (BTS Passed Reduced ATP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8
Table 6-11: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8
Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8
Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement Failure . . . . . . .
6-9
Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Carrier Measurement Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9
Table 6-15: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10
Table 6-16: No GLI Control via LMF (all GLIs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15
Table 6-17: No GLI Control through Span Line Connection (Both GLIs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15
Table 6-18: MGLI Control Good - No Control over Co-located GLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15
Table 6-19: MGLI Control Good - No Control over AMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-16
Table 6-20: No BBX Control in the Shelf - No Control over Co-located GLIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-16
Table 6-21: MGLI Control Good - No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-16
Table 6-22: No MCC Channel Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17
Table 6-23: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-18
Table 6-24: No DC Input Voltage to any C-CCP Shelf Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-19
Table 6-25: TX and RX Signal Routing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-19
Table 6-26: Troubleshoot Control Link Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-28
Table 6-27: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-30
Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
Table A-2: Site Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-2
Table A-3: Preliminary Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-2
Table A-4: Pre-power Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-3
Table A-5: Pre-power Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-4
Table A-6: GPS Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-5
Table A-7: LFR Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-6
Table A-8: LPA IM Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-7
Table A-9: LPA Convergence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-8
Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (3-S: 1-C, and 2- and 4-C Non-adjacent Channels) . . . . . . . . .
A-9
Table A-11: TX BLO Calibration (3-S: 2-C Adjacent Channels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-10
Table A-12: TX BLO Calibration (3-S: 3- or 4-C Adjacent Channels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-11
Table A-13: TX BLO Calibration (6-S: 1-C, 2-C Non-adjacent Channels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-14
Table A-14: BTS Redundancy/Alarm Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-16
Table A-15: TX Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-16
Table A-16: RX Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-17
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Table of Contents
68P09255A61-4
Table A-17: AMR CDI Alarm Input Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-17
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-2
Table C-1: When RF Optimization Is required on the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-1
Table C-2: When to Optimize Inter-frame Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-2
Table C-3: SC 4812T BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-3
Table D-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-1
Table E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-2
Table E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-4
Table E-3: 1700 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel (Korean Bands) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-7
Table F-1: System Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-2
Table F-2: Manual Cable Calibration Test Equipment Setup (using the HP PCS Interface) . . . . . .
F-3
Table F-3: HP PCS Interface Test Equipment Setup for Manual Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-7
Table F-4: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-8
Table G-1: VSWR Measurement Procedure - HP Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-2
Table G-2: VSWR Measurement Procedure - Advantest Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-4
Table H-1: Download ROM Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-1
Table I-1: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-2
Table I-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-4
Table I-3: HP8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-7
Table I-4: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-9
Table I-5: In-Service Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-15
Table J-1: Verify and/or Change HP437 Power Meter GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-1
Table J-2: Verify and/or Change Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-2
Table J-3: Verify and/or Change Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-3
Table J-4: Verify and/or Change HP8935 GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-4
Table J-5: Verify and/or Change HP8921A and HP83236A GPIB Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-5
Table J-6: Verify and/or Change Advantest R3465 GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-7
Table J-7: Verify and Change Advantest R3267 GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-9
Table J-8: Verify and Change Agilent E4406A GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-11
Table J-9: Verify and Change Agilent E4432B GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-12
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
xv
Foreword
68P09255A61-4
Foreword
Scope of manual
This manual is intended for use by cellular telephone system
craftspersons in the day-to-day operation of Motorola cellular system
equipment and ancillary devices. It is assumed that the user of this
information has a general understanding of telephony, as used in the
operation of the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN), and is
familiar with these concepts as they are applied in the cellular
mobile/portable radiotelephone environment. The user, however, is not
expected to have any detailed technical knowledge of the internal
operation of the equipment.
This manual is not intended to replace the system and equipment
training offered by Motorola, although it can be used to supplement or
enhance the knowledge gained through such training.
Text conventions
The following special paragraphs are used in this manual to point out
information that must be read. This information may be set-off from the
surrounding text, but is always preceded by a bold title in capital letters.
The three categories of these special paragraphs are:
xvi
NOTE
Presents additional, helpful, non-critical information that you can
use.
Bold-text notes indicate information to help you avoid an
undesirable situation or provides additional information to
help you understand a topic or concept.
CAUTION
Presents information to identify a situation in which equipment
damage could occur, thus avoiding damage to equipment.
WARNING
Presents information to warn you of a potentially hazardous
situation in which there is a possibility of personal injury.
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Foreword
68P09255A61-4
The following typographical conventions are used for the presentation of
software information:
 In text, sans serif BOLDFACE CAPITAL characters (a type style
without angular strokes: i.e., SERIF versus SANS SERIF) are used to
name a command.
 In text, typewriter style characters represent prompts and the
system output as displayed on an operator terminal or printer.
 In command definitions, sans serif boldface characters represent those
parts of the command string that must be entered exactly as shown and
typewriter style characters represent command output responses
as displayed on an operator terminal or printer.
 In the command format of the command definition, typewriter
style characters represent the command parameters.
Changes to manual
Changes that occur after the printing date are incorporated into your
manual by Cellular Manual Revisions (CMRs). The information in this
manual is updated, as required, by a CMR when new options and
procedures become available for general use or when engineering
changes occur. The cover sheet(s) that accompany each CMR should be
retained for future reference. Refer to the Revision History page for a list
of all applicable CMRs contained in this manual.
Receiving updates
Technical Information Products and Services (TIPS) maintains a
customer database that reflects the type and number of manuals ordered
or shipped since the original delivery of your Motorola equipment. Also
identified in this database is a “key” individual (such as Documentation
Coordinator or Facility Librarian) designated to receive manual updates
from TIPS as they are released.
To ensure that your facility receives updates to your manuals, it is
important that the information in our database is correct and up-to-date.
Therefore, if you have corrections or wish to make changes to the
information in our database (i.e., to assign a new “key” individual),
please contact Technical Information Products and Services.
MOTOROLA, INC.
Technical Information Products and Services
Phone:
Within U.S.A. and Canada . . . . . 800-872-8225
Outside of U.S.A. and Canada . . +1-847-435-5700
FAX: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +1-847-435-5541
Reporting manual errors
In the event that you locate an error or identify a deficiency in your
manual, please take time to write to us at the address above. Be sure to
include your name and address, the complete manual title and part
number (located on the manual spine, cover, or title page), the page
number (found at the bottom of each page) where the error is located,
and any comments you may have regarding what you have found. We
appreciate any comments from the users of our manuals.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
xvii
Foreword
68P09255A61-4
24-hour support service
If you have any questions or concerns regarding the operation of your
equipment, please contact the Customer Network Resolution Center for
immediate assistance. The 24 hour telephone numbers are:
Arlington Heights, IL . . . . . . . . . .
Arlington Heights, International . .
Cork, Ireland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Swindon, England . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xviii
800-433-5202
+1-847-632-5390
44-1793-565444
44-1793-565444
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
FCC Requirements
68P09255A61-4
FCC Requirements
Content
This section presents Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules Parts 15 and 68 requirements and compliance information for the
SC4812T/ET/ET Lite series Radio Frequency Base Transceiver
Stations.
FCC Part 15 Requirements
Part 15.19a(3) - INFORMATION TO USER
NOTE
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Part 15.21 - INFORMATION TO USER
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Motorola
could void your authority to operate the equipment.
15.105(b) - INFORMATION TO USER
NOTE
Aug 2002
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment
OFF and ON, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for
help.
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
xix
FCC Requirements
68P09255A61-4
FCC Part 68 Requirements
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules. A label on the GLI3 board, easily visible
with the board removed, contains the FCC Registration Number for this
equipment in the format < US: IHEXDNANGLI3-1X>. If requested,
this information must be provided to the telephone company.
FCC Part 68 Registered Devices
Device
FCC Part 68 ID
Group Line Interface (GLI3) *
US: IHEXDNANGLI3-1X
Cisco Model 1900-27
US: 5B1DDNDN0006
ADC KENTROX Model 537
US: F81USA-31217-DE-N
* NOTE: The BTS equipment is always equipped with the GLI3, < US:
IHEXDNANGLI3-1X>, and may be used in conjunction with one or
both of the listed registered CSU devices, or another registered CSU
device not listed above.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment,
operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of your T1. If
this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice so that
you can modify your equipment as required to maintain uninterrupted
service.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone
company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of
service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone
company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised
of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is
necessary.
If you experience trouble operating this equipment with the T1, please
contact:
Global Customer Network Resolution Center (CNRC)
1501 W. Shure Drive, 3436N
Arlington Heights, Illinois 60004
Phone Number: (847) 632-5390
for repair and/or warranty information. You should not attempt to repair
this equipment yourself. This equipment contains no customer or
user-serviceable parts.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Motorola could
void your authority to operate this equipment.
xx
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
General Safety
68P09255A61-4
General Safety
Remember! . . . Safety
depends on you!!
The following general safety precautions must be observed during all
phases of operation, service, and repair of the equipment described in
this manual. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific
warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design,
manufacture, and intended use of the equipment. Motorola, Inc. assumes
no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.
The safety precautions listed below represent warnings of certain dangers
of which we are aware. You, as the user of this product, should follow
these warnings and all other safety precautions necessary for the safe
operation of the equipment in your operating environment.
Ground the instrument
To minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis and enclosure must be
connected to an electrical ground. If the equipment is supplied with a
three-conductor ac power cable, the power cable must be either plugged
into an approved three-contact electrical outlet or used with a
three-contact to two-contact adapter. The three-contact to two-contact
adapter must have the grounding wire (green) firmly connected to an
electrical ground (safety ground) at the power outlet. The power jack and
mating plug of the power cable must meet International Electrotechnical
Commission (IEC) safety standards.
Do not operate in an explosive
atmosphere
Do not operate the equipment in the presence of flammable gases or
fumes. Operation of any electrical equipment in such an environment
constitutes a definite safety hazard.
Keep away from live circuits
Operating personnel must:
 not remove equipment covers. Only Factory Authorized Service
Personnel or other qualified maintenance personnel may remove
equipment covers for internal subassembly, or component
replacement, or any internal adjustment.
 not replace components with power cable connected. Under certain
conditions, dangerous voltages may exist even with the power cable
removed.
 always disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them.
Do not service or adjust alone
Do not attempt internal service or adjustment, unless another person,
capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation, is present.
Do not substitute parts or
modify equipment
Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install
substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of equipment.
Contact Motorola Warranty and Repair for service and repair to ensure
that safety features are maintained.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
xxi
General Safety
68P09255A61-4
Dangerous procedure
warnings
Warnings, such as the example below, precede potentially dangerous
procedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in the
warnings must be followed. You should also employ all other safety
precautions that you deem necessary for the operation of the equipment
in your operating environment.
WARNING
xxii
Dangerous voltages, capable of causing death, are present in this
equipment. Use extreme caution when handling, testing, and
adjusting .
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Revision History
68P09255A61-4
Revision History
Manual Number
68P09255A61- 4
Manual Title
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
Version Information
The following table lists the manual version, date of version, and
remarks on the version. Revision bars printed in page margins (as shown
to the side) identify material which has changed from the previous
release of this publication.
Version
Level
Date of Issue
Mar 2002
DRAFT Manual submitted for engineering markup
Apr 2002
PRELIMINARY
Jul 2002
DV&V REVIEW
Aug 2002
PRELIMINARY: Incorporate comments from DV&V and engineering.
Aug 2002
Remarks
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
xxiii
Patent Notification
68P09255A61-4
Patent Notification
Patent numbers
This product is manufactured and/or operated under one or more of the
following patents and other patents pending:
4128740
4193036
4237534
4268722
4282493
4301531
4302845
4312074
4350958
4354248
4367443
4369516
4369520
4369522
4375622
4485486
4491972
4517561
4519096
4549311
4550426
4564821
4573017
4581602
4590473
4591851
4616314
4636791
4644351
4646038
4649543
4654655
4654867
xxiv
4661790
4667172
4672657
4694484
4696027
4704734
4709344
4710724
4726050
4729531
4737978
4742514
4751725
4754450
4764737
4764849
4775998
4775999
4797947
4799253
4802236
4803726
4811377
4811380
4811404
4817157
4827507
4829543
4833701
4837800
4843633
4847869
4852090
4860281
4866710
4870686
4872204
4873683
4876740
4881082
4885553
4887050
4887265
4893327
4896361
4910470
4914696
4918732
4941203
4945570
4956854
4970475
4972355
4972432
4979207
4984219
4984290
4992753
4998289
5020076
5021801
5022054
5023900
5028885
5030793
5031193
5036515
5036531
5038399
5040127
5041699
5047762
5048116
5055800
5055802
5058136
5060227
5060265
5065408
5067139
5068625
5070310
5073909
5073971
5075651
5077532
5077741
5077757
5081641
5083304
5090051
5093632
5095500
5105435
5111454
5111478
5113400
5117441
5119040
5119508
5121414
5123014
5127040
5127100
5128959
5130663
5133010
5140286
5142551
5142696
5144644
5146609
5146610
5152007
5155448
5157693
5159283
5159593
5159608
5170392
5170485
5170492
5182749
5184349
5185739
5187809
5187811
5193102
5195108
5200655
5203010
5204874
5204876
5204977
5207491
5210771
5212815
5212826
5214675
5214774
5216692
5218630
5220936
5222078
5222123
5222141
5222251
5224121
5224122
5226058
5228029
5230007
5233633
5235612
5235614
5239294
5239675
5241545
5241548
5241650
5241688
5243653
5245611
5245629
5245634
5247544
5251233
5255292
5257398
5259021
5261119
5263047
5263052
5263055
5265122
5268933
5271042
5274844
5274845
5276685
5276707
5276906
5276907
5276911
5276913
5276915
5278871
5280630
5285447
5287544
5287556
5289505
5291475
5295136
5297161
5299228
5301056
5301188
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
5301353
5301365
5303240
5303289
5303407
5305468
5307022
5307512
5309443
5309503
5311143
5311176
5311571
5313489
5319712
5321705
5321737
5323391
5325394
5327575
5329547
5329635
5339337
D337328
D342249
D342250
D347004
D349689
RE31814
Aug 2002
1
Chapter 1
Introduction
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
1-1
Optimization Manual: Scope and Layout
68P09255A61-4
Optimization Manual: Scope and Layout
Scope of This Document
This document provides information pertaining to the optimization and
audit tests of Motorola SC 4812T Base Transceiver Subsystem (BTS)
equipment frames equipped with trunked high-power Linear Power
Amplifiers (LPAs) and their associated internal and external interfaces.
This document assumes the following prerequisites:
 The BTS frames and cabling have been installed per the BTS Frame
Installation manual, which covers the physical “bolt down” of all SC
series equipment frames, and the SC 4812T CDMA BTS Installation
manual, which covers BTS specific cabling configurations.
In most applications the same test procedure is used for all equipment
variations. However, decision break points are provided throughout the
procedure when equipment specific tests are required.
NOTE
As the Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) Local
Maintenance Facility (LMF) capability comes on-line,
applicable LMF based procedures will be incorporated.
Eventually, only the CDMA LMF platform will be supported as
the recommended customer method of interfacing with and
servicing the SC series BTS equipment.
We at Motorola Technical Education & Documentation have strived to
incorporate into this document the many suggestions and inputs received
from you, the customer, since the inception of the SC product line. At
the same time, we have tried to insure that the scope of the document
targets both the novice and expert site technician and engineer with
the information required to successfully perform the task at hand. If
in some areas, the manual seems to cover the test in too much detail (or
not enough detail) we hope you will keep this in mind.
1-2
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Optimization Manual: Scope and Layout
68P09255A61-4
Document Composition
This document covers the following major areas.
 Introduction, consisting of preliminary background information (such
as component and subassembly locations and frame layouts) to be
considered by the Cellular Field Engineer (CFE) before optimization
or tests are performed.
 Preliminary Operations, consisting of pre-power up tests, jumper
configuration of BTS sub-assemblies, and initial application of power
to the BTS equipment frames. Download of all BTS processor boards,
and LPAs.
 Optimization/Calibration, consisting of downloading all BTS
processor boards, LPA verification, radio frequency (RF) path
verification, Bay Level Offset (BLO) calibration, and Radio
Frequency Diagnostic System (RFDS) functions and calibration
 Acceptance Test Procedures (ATP), consisting of automated ATP
scripts executed by the LMF and used to verify all major transmit
(TX) and receive (RX) performance characteristics on all BTS
equipment. Also generates an ATP report.
 Optional manual performance tests used to verify specific areas of site
operation or to verify regulation compliance. These tests are typically
used to isolate faults down to the module level and information
necessary to better understand equipment operation.
 Site turnover after ATP is completed.
 Appendices that contain pertinent data sheets that are filled out
manually by the CFE at the site, Pseudorandom Noise (PN) Offset
information, an optimization/ATP matrix , output power data tables,
CDMA operating frequency programming information, manual test
setup information, procedures for verifying that the Voltage Standing
Wave Ratio (VSWR) of all antennas and associated feed lines fall
within acceptable limits, procedures for downloading ROM and RAM
code, and procedures for performing in-service ATP.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
1-3
Optimization Manual: Scope and Layout
68P09255A61-4
CDMA LMF Product Description
The CDMA LMF is a graphical user interface (GUI) based LMF. This
product is specifically designed to provide cellular communications field
personnel the vehicle to support the following CDMA BTS operations:
Installation
Maintenance
Calibration
Optimization
Graphical User Interface Overview
The LMF uses a GUI, which works in the following way:
 Select the device or devices.
 Select the action to apply to the selected device(s).
 While action is in progress, a status report window displays the action
taking place and other status information.
 The status report window indicates when the action is complete and
displays other pertinent information.
 Clicking the OK button closes the status report window.
Command Line Interface Overview
The LMF also provides Command Line Interface (CLI) capability.
Activate the CLI by clicking on a shortcut icon on the desktop. The CLI
cannot be launched from the GUI, only from the desktop icon.
Refer to the LMF CLI Commands, R15.x manual for a complete
explanation of the CLI commands and their use.
Online Help
Task oriented online help is available in the CDMA LMF by clicking on
Help from the menu bar.
1-4
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Purpose of the Optimization
68P09255A61-4
Purpose of the Optimization
Why Optimize?
Proper optimization and calibration assures:
 Accurate downlink RF power levels are transmitted from the site.
 Accurate uplink signal strength determinations are made by the site.
What Is Optimization?
Optimization compensates for the site-specific cabling and normal
equipment variations. Cables that interconnect the BTS and Duplexer
assemblies (if used), for example, are cut and installed at the time of the
BTS frame installation at the site. Site optimization guarantees that the
combined losses of the new cables and the gain/loss characteristics and
built-in tolerances of each BTS frame do not accumulate, causing
improper site operation.
Optimization identifies the accumulated loss (or gain) for all receive and
transmit paths at the BTS site, and stores that value in a database.
 The RX path for the starter frame starts at the ancillary equipment
frame RFDS RX directional coupler antenna feedline port, through the
ancillary equipment frame RFDS RX directional coupler antenna
feedline port, through the RX input port on the top of the frame,
through the bandpass filter, Combiner Input/Output (CIO) card,
Multicoupler Preselector Card (MPC), and additional splitter circuitry,
ending at a CDMA Channel Processor (C-CCP) backplane Broad
Band Transceiver (BBX) slot in the C-CCP shelf.
NOTE
In this manual, all version of the BBX, MCC, and GLI usable in
this BTS are generically identified as BBX, MCC, or GLI unless
otherwise specified.
 The RX path for the expansion frame starts at the ancillary equipment
frame RFDS RX directional coupler antenna feedline port, through the
ancillary equipment frame RFDS RX directional coupler antenna
feedline port, through the RX input port on the top of the starter
frame, through the bandpass filter and CIO card, out the expansion
port at the top of the starter frame, through the expansion cable to the
expansion port on the expansion frame, through the Expansion
Multicoupler Preselector Card (EMPC) and CIO, ending at a BBX slot
in the C-CCP shelf.
 The TX path starts at the BBX, through the C-CCP backplane slot,
travels through the LPA/Combiner TX Filter and ends at the top of the
RFDS TX directional coupler antenna feedline port (CDMA), installed
on the ancillary equipment frame. If the RFDS option is added, then
the TX path continues and ends at the top of the RFDS TX directional
coupler antenna feedline port installed in the ancillary equipment
frame. The TX paths are identical for the starter and expansion
frames.
These values are factored in by the BTS equipment internally, leaving
only site specific antenna feed line loss and antenna gain characteristics
to be factored in by the CFE when determining site Effective Radiated
Power (ERP) output power requirements.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
1-5
Purpose of the Optimization
68P09255A61-4
Each C-CCP shelf BBX board is optimized to a specific RX and TX
antenna port. (One BBX board acts in a redundant capacity for BBXs
1-12, and is optimized to all antenna ports.) A single value is generated
for each path, thereby eliminating the accumulation of error that would
occur from individually measuring and summing the gain and loss of
each element in the path.
When to Optimize
New Installations
After the initial site installation, it must be prepared for operation. This
preparation includes verifying hardware installation, initial power-up,
download of operating code, and Clock Synchronization Module (CSM)
verification.
Next, the optimization is performed. Optimization includes performance
verification and calibration of all transmit and receive RF paths, and
download of accumulated calibration data.
After optimization, a series of manual pre-ATP verification tests are
covered that address alarm/redundancy tests.
After manual pre-Acceptance Test Procedure (pre-ATP) verification
tests, a series of manual ATP CDMA verification tests are covered using
the actual equipment set up. An ATP is also required before the site can
be placed in service.
Site Expansion
Optimization is required after expansion of a site.
Periodic Optimization
Periodic optimization of a site may also be required, depending on the
requirements of the overall system.
Repaired Sites
Refer to Appendix C for detailed basic guideline tables and detailed
Optimization/ATP Test Matrix outlining the minimum tests that must be
performed anytime a BTS subassembly or RF cable associated with it is
replaced.
1-6
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Abbreviations and Acronyms
68P09255A61-4
Abbreviations and Acronyms
Table 1-1 identifies the equipment related abbreviations and acronyms
used in this manual.
Table 1-1: Abbreviations and Acronyms
Acronym
AMR
ATP
BBX
BBX2
BBX-1X
BLO
BTS
CBSC
CCD
CDMA
CE
CHI
CIO
CLI
CM
CNEOMI
CSM
CSM-I
CSM-II
DRDC
EMI
EMPC
FRU
GLI
GLI2
GLI3
GPS
HSO
HSOX
I&Q
Aug 2002
Definition
Alarm Monitor Reporting
Acceptance Test Procedure
Broadband Transceiver
Broadband Transceiver, 2nd Generation supports
IS-95A/B
Broadband Transceiver, 3rd Generation supports
IS-95A/B and cdma2000 1X
Bay Level Offset
Base Transceiver Subsystem
Centralized Base Station Controller
CDMA Clock Distribution
Code Division Multiple Access
Channel Element
Concentration Highway Interface
Combiner Input/Output
Command Line Interface
Channel Module
Common Network Element Operation and
Maintenance Interface
Clock Synchronization Manager
Clock Synchronization Manager, 1st Generation
CSM card hardware version
Clock Synchronization Manager, 2nd Generation
CSM card hardware version
Duplexer/RX Filter/Directional Coupler
Electromagnetic Interference
Expansion Multicoupler Preselector Card
Field Replaceable Unit
Group Line Interface,
Group Line Interface, 2nd Generation card
hardware version
Group Line Interface, 3rd Generation card
hardware version for packet backhaul
Global Positioning System
High Stability Oscillator
High Stability Oscillator Expansion
In-phase and Quadrature
. . . continued on next page
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
1-7
Abbreviations and Acronyms
68P09255A61-4
Table 1-1: Abbreviations and Acronyms
Acronym
ISB
LFR
LMF
LORAN
LPA
MCC
MCC8E/24E
MCC1X-16/48
MGLI
MM
MMI
MPC
MSC
OMCR
PDA
PN
RF
RGD
RGPS
RSSI
SBPF
SCAP
SNMP
STRAU
SU
TCH
TRDC
TSI
UTC
1-8
Definition
Inter Shelf Bus
Low Frequency Receiver
Local Maintenance Facility
LOng RAnge Navigational
Linear Power Amplifier
Multi-Channel CDMA
Multi-Channel CDMA, 8/24 Channels; 2nd
Generation supports IS-95A/B
Multi-Channel CDMA, 16/48 Channels; 3rd
Generation supports IS-95A/B and cdma2000
1X
Master Group Line Interface
Mobility Manager
Man Machine Interface
Multicoupler Preselector Card
Mobile Switching Center
Operations Maintenance Center - Radio
Power Distribution Assembly
Pseudo-random Noise
Radio Frequency
Remote GPS Distribution
Remote GPS
Received Signal Strength Indicator
Single Bandpass Filter
SC (Super Cell) Application Protocol
Simple Network Management Protocol
SC (Super Cell) Transcoder/Rate Adaption Unit
Subscriber Unit
Traffic Channel
Transmit Receive filter/Directional Coupler
Time Slot Interchanger
Universal Time Coordinates
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Required Test Equipment
68P09255A61-4
Required Test Equipment
Policy
The LMF is used in conjunction with Motorola recommended test
equipment and is part of a “calibrated test set”. To ensure consistent,
reliable, and repeatable optimization test results, only recommended test
equipment supported by the LMF must be used to optimize the BTS
equipment.
NOTE
During manual testing, you can, of course, substitute test
equipment with other test equipment models not supported by
the LMF, but those models must meet the same technical
specifications.
The customer has the responsibility of accounting for any measurement
variances and/or additional losses/inaccuracies that can be introduced
as a result of test equipment substitutions. Before beginning
optimization or troubleshooting, make sure that the test equipment
needed is on hand and operating properly.
Test Equipment Calibration
Optimum system performance and capacity depend on regular equipment
service, calibration, and characterization prior to BTS optimization.
Follow the original equipment manufacturer (OEM) recommended
maintenance and calibration schedules closely.
Test Cable Calibration
Equipment test cables are very important in optimization. Motorola
recommends that the cable calibration be run at every BTS with the test
cables attached. This method compensates for test cable insertion loss
within the test equipment itself. No other allowance for test cable
insertion loss needs to be made during the performance of tests.
Another method is to account for the loss by entering it into the LMF
during the optimization procedure. This method requires accurate test
cable characterization in a shop. The cable should be tagged with the
characterization information prior to field optimization.
Equipment Warm-up
After arriving at the a site, the test equipment should be plugged in and
turned on to allow warm up and stabilization to occur for as long as
possible. The following pieces of test equipment must be warmed-up for
a minimum of 60 minutes prior to using for BTS optimization or RFDS
calibration procedures.
 Communications Test Set
 Rubidium Time Base
 Power Meter
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
1-9
Required Test Equipment
68P09255A61-4
Test Equipment Specifications
Test equipment specification requirements for the test equipment (or
configuration of test equipment) used to make up the general test
equipment (DVM, etc) are given in the following paragraphs.
LMF Hardware Requirements
Motorola recommends an LMF computer platform that meets the
following requirements:
Notebook computer
266 MHz (32-bit CPU) Pentium processor
Windows 98SE or Windows 2000 operating system
128 MB RAM for Windows 98SE; 256 MB RAM for Windows 2000
4 GB internal hard disk drive
CD ROM drive
3 1/2 inch floppy drive
Color display with 1024 x 768 pixel resolution and capability to
display more than 256 colors
 Serial port (COM 1)
 Parallel port (LPT 1)
 PCMCIA Ethernet interface card (for example, 3COM Etherlink III)
with a 10Base-T-to-coax adapter
Test Equipment List
The following pieces of test equipment are required during the
optimization procedure. Common assorted tools like screwdrivers and
frame keys are not listed but are still required. Read the owner’s manual
on all of the following major pieces of test equipment to understand their
individual operation prior to use in optimization.
NOTE
Always refer to specific OEM test equipment documentation for
detailed operating instructions.
Ethernet LAN Transceiver
 PCMCIA Ethernet Adpater + Ethernet UTP Adapter: 3COM Model Etherlink III 3C589B
1-10
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Required Test Equipment
68P09255A61-4
10BaseT/10Base2 Converter
 Transition Engineering Model E-CX-TBT-03 10BaseT/10Base2
Converter
- or -
 Transition Engineering Model E-CX-TBT-03 10BaseT/10Base2
Converter
NOTE
Xircom Model PE3-10B2 or equivalent can also be used to
interface the LMF Ethernet connection to the frame.
3C-PC-COMBO CBL
 Connects to the 3COM PCMCIA card and eliminates the need for a
10BaseT/10base2 Converter.
RS-232 to GPIB Interface
 National Instruments GPIB-232-CT with Motorola CGDSEDN04X
RS232 serial null modem cable or equivalent; used to interface the
LMF to the test equipment.
 Standard RS-232 cable can be used with the following modifications
(see Figure 1-1):
- This solution passes only the 3 minimum electrical connections
between the LMF and the General Purpose Information Bus (GPIB)
interface. The control signals are jumpered as enabled on both ends
of the RS-232 cable (9-pin D). TX and RX signals are crossed as
Null Modem effect. Pin 5 is the ground reference.
- Short pins 7 and 8 together, and short pins 1, 4, and 6 together on
each connector.
Figure 1-1: Null Modem Cable Detail
9-PIN D-FEMALE
GND
RX
TX
RTS
CTS
RSD/DCD
DTR
DSR
9-PIN D-FEMALE
ON BOTH CONNECTORS
SHORT PINS 7, 8;
SHORT PINS 1, 4, & 6
GND
TX
RX
RTS
CTS
RSD/DCD
DTR
DSR
FW00362
Man Machine Interface (MMI) Interface Kit (Motorola part
number CGDSMMICABLE219112)
This cable is used to connect the LMF to the BTS.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
1-11
Required Test Equipment
68P09255A61-4
Communications System Analyzer
The communication system analyzer is used during optimization and
testing of the RF communications portion of BTS equipment and
provides the following functions:
(1) Frequency counter
(2) RF power meter (average and code domain)
(3) RF Signal Generator (capable of CDMA modulation)
(4) Spectrum Analyzer
(5) CDMA Code Domain analyzer
The following communication system analyzers are currently supported
by the LMF:
 HP8921A/600 Analyzer - including 83203B CDMA Interface,
manual control system card, and 83236A/B Personal communication
Interface (PCS) Interface for 1700/1900 MHz BTS.
 Advantest R3465 Analyzer - including R3561L Test Source Unit
 CyberTest Communication Analyzer
 Hewlett-Packard HP 8935 - with option 200 or R2K for 1X TX and
with Agilent E4432B Signal Generator for 1X FER
 Advantest R3267 Analyzer - including R3562 Test Source Unit
 Agilent E4406A Analyzer - including E4432B Test Source Unit
GPIB Cables
 Hewlett Packard 10833A or equivalent; 1 to 2 meters (3 to 6 feet) long
used to interconnect test equipment and LMF terminal.
Power Meter
One of the following power meters is required with the HP8921 and
Advantest analyzers:
 Hewlett Packard Model HP HP437B with HP8481A power sensor
 Gigatronics 8541C with model 80601A power sensor
Timing Reference Cables
 Two BNC-male to BNC-male RG316 cables; 3.05 m (10 ft.) long.
Used to connect the communications analyzer to the front timing
reference of the CSM cards in the BTS frame.
Digital Multimeter
 Fluke Model 8062A with Y8134 test lead kit or equivalent; used for
precision dc and ac measurements, requiring 4-1/2 digits.
1-12
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Required Test Equipment
68P09255A61-4
Directional Coupler
 Narda Model 30661 30 dB (Motorola part no. 58D09732W01)
1900 MHz coupler terminated with two Narda Model 375BN-M
loads, or equivalent.
 Narda Model 30445 30 dB (Motorola Part No. 58D09643T01 )
800 MHz coupler terminated with two Narda Model 375BN-M loads,
or equivalent.
RF Attenuator
 20 dB fixed attenuator, 20 W (Narda 768-20); used with 1.7/1.9 GHz
test cable calibrations or during general troubleshooting procedures.
RF Terminations/Loads
 At least three 100-Watt (or larger) non-radiating RF
terminations/loads.
Miscellaneous RF Adapters, Loads, etc
 As required to interface test cables and BTS equipment and for
various test set ups. Should include at least two 50 Ohm loads (type
N) for calibration and one RF short, two N-Type Female-to-Female
Adapters.
LAN Cable
 BNC-to BNC 50 ohm coaxial cable [.91 m (3 ft) maximum] with an
F-to-F adapter, used to connect the 10BaseT-to-coaxial adapter to
the BTS LAN connector.
High-impedance Conductive Wrist Strap
 Motorola Model 42-80385A59; used to prevent damage from
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) when handling or working with
modules.
Optional Equipment
NOTE
Not all optional equipment specified here will be supported by
the LMF in automated tests or when executing various measure
type command line interface (CLI) commands. It is meant to
serve as a list of additional equipment that might be required
during maintenance and troubleshooting operations.
Frequency Counter
 Stanford Research Systems SR620 or equivalent. If direct
measurement of the 3 MHz or 19.6608 MHz references is required.
Spectrum Analyzer
 Spectrum Analyzer (HP8594E with CDMA personality card) or
equivalent; required for manual tests.
Local Area Network (LAN) Tester
 Model NETcat 800 LAN troubleshooter (or equivalent); used to
supplement LAN tests using the ohmmeter.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
1-13
Required Test Equipment
68P09255A61-4
Span Line (T1/E1) Verification Equipment
 As required for local application
Oscilloscope
 Tektronics Model 2445 or equivalent; for waveform viewing, timing,
and measurements or during general troubleshooting procedure.
2-way Splitter
 Mini-Circuits Model ZFSC-2-2500 or equivalent; provides the
diversity receive input to the BTS
High Stability 10 MHz Rubidium Standard
 Stanford Research Systems SR625 or equivalent - required for CSM
and Low Frequency Receiver/High Stability Oscillator (LFR/HSO)
frequency verification.
Itasca Alarms Test Box
 Itasca CGDSCMIS00014 - This test box may be used as a tool to
assist in the testing of customer alarms.
1-14
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Required Documentation
68P09255A61-4
Required Documentation
Required Documents
The following documents are required to perform optimization of the
cell site equipment:
 Site Document (generated by Motorola Systems Engineering), which
includes:
- General Site Information
- Floor Plan
- RF Power Levels
- Frequency Plan (includes Site PN and Operating Frequencies)
- Channel Allocation (Paging, Traffic, etc.)
- Board Placement
- Site Wiring List
- CDF files (bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf)
BTS Frame Installation Manual; 68P09226A18
1X SC 4812T BTS Hardware Installation; 68P09255A60
Demarcation Document (Scope of Work Agreement)
CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide; 68P64114A78
CDMA RFDS Hardware Installation manual; 68P64113A93
CDMA RFDS User’s Guide, 68P64113A37
LMF CLI Commands, R16, 68P09253A56
Equipment Manuals for non-Motorola test equipment
Intended Reader Profile
The information in this manual set is intended for use by the cellular
communications craftsperson(s) in the initial installation and
configuration, as well as the day-to-day operation and maintenance of a
BTS.
The user of this information has a general understanding of telephony, as
used in the operation of the Public Switched Telephone
Network (PSTN), and is familiar with these concepts as they are applied
in the cellular and maintenance mobile/portable radiotelephone
environment.
The user also needs a working knowledge of the computer platform
operating system being used (Windows 98 or Windows 2000).
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
1-15
BTS Equipment Identification
68P09255A61-4
BTS Equipment Identification
Equipment Overview
The Motorola SC 4812T BTS can consist of the following equipment
frames:
 At least one BTS starter frame
- +27 V BTS (see Figure 1-2)
- -48 V BTS (see Figure 1-3)
 Ancillary equipment frame (or wall mounted equipment)
 Expansion frames
- +27 V BTS (see Figure 1-4)
- -48 V BTS (see Figure 1-5)
Ancillary Equipment Frame Identification
NOTE
Equipment listed below can be wall mounted or mounted in a
standard 19 inch frame. The description assumes that all
equipment is mounted in a frame for clarity.
If equipped with the RFDS option, the RFDS and directional couplers
are the interface between the site antennas and the BTS or Modem
frame. The RFDS equipment includes:
 Directional couplers
 Site receive bandpass/bandreject filters
 RFDS
Logical BTS
The BTS software implements the logical BTS capability. Previously, all
BTS frames co-located at a single site had to be identified in the
network with separate and distinct BTS ID numbers. In the Logical BTS
feature, all frames located at a single BTS site are identified with unique
Frame ID numbers (Frame ID Numbers 1, 101, 201, 301) under a single
(site) BTS ID number. A logical BTS can consist of up to four
SC 4812T frames.When the LMF is connected to frame 1 of a logical
BTS, you can access all devices in all of the frames that make up the
logical BTS. A logical BTS requires a CDF file that includes equipage
information for all of the logical BTS frames and their devices and a
CBSC file that includes channel data for all of the logical BTS fames.
1-16
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
BTS Equipment Identification
68P09255A61-4
Logical BTS Numbering
The first frame of a logical BTS has a -1 suffix (e.g., BTS-812-1 ).
Other frames of the logical BTS are numbered with suffixes, -101 , -201 ,
and -301 (e. g. BTS-812-201 ). When you log into a BTS, a FRAME
tab is displayed for each frame. If there is only one frame for the BTS,
there is only one tab (e.g., FRAME-282-1 ) for BTS-282. If a logical
BTS has more than one frame, there is a separate FRAME tab for each
frame (e.g. FRAME-438-1 , FRAME-438-101 , and FRAME-438-201
for a BTS-438 that has three frames). If an RFDS is included in the
CDF file, an RFDS tab (e.g., RFDS-438-1) is displayed.
Actions (e.g., ATP tests) can be initiated for selected devices in one or
more frames of a logical BTS. Refer to the Select devices help screen for
information on how to select devices.
C-CCP Shelf Card/Module Device ID Numbers
All cards/modules/boards in the frames at a single site, assigned to a
single BTS number, are also identified with unique Device ID numbers
dependent upon the Frame ID number in which they are located. Refer to
Table 1-2 and Table 1-3 for specific C-CCP Shelf Device ID numbers.
Table 1-2: C-CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Top Shelf)
Frame
Card/Module ID Number (Left to Right)
Power Power Power AMR GLI2
(PS-1) (PS-2) (PS-3)
-1
-1
MCC
BBX
BBXR
MPC/
EMPC
-1
R1
101
101
101
101
102
103
104
105
106
101
102
103
104
105
106
R101
201
201
201
201
202
203
204
205
206
201
202
203
204
205
206
R201
301
301
301
301
302
303
304
305
306
301
302
303
304
305
306
R301
Table 1-3: C-CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf)
Frame
Card/Module ID Number (Left to Right)
HSO/ CSM CSM CCD CCD
LFR
-1
-2
AMR GLI2-2
MCC
10
11
12
12
101
101
102
102
102
107 108 109 110 111 112 107 108 109 110 111 112
201
201
202
202
102
207 208 209 210 211 212 207 208 209 210 211 212
301
301
302
302
102
307 308 309 310 311 312 307 308 309 310 311 312
FIELD TRIAL
11
MPC/
EMPC
-2
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
10
SW
Aug 2002
BBX
1-17
BTS Equipment Identification
68P09255A61-4
Figure 1-2: +27 V SC 4812T BTS Starter Frame
Span I/O A
RGD (Needed for
Expansion only)
Site I/O
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Span I/O B
Exhaust Region
C-CCP Cage
RX In (1A - 6A
and 1B - 6B)
TX Out (1 - 6)
Á
ÁÁ
Á
ÁÁ
Power Input
Connection
Expansion I/O
Housing
Á
Á
Breakers
Front Cosmetic
Panel
LPA Cage
Combiner
Section
For clarity, doors are not shown.
ti-CDMA-WP-00098-v01-ildoc-ftw
1-18
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
BTS Equipment Identification
68P09255A61-4
Figure 1-3: -48 V SC 4812T BTS Starter Frame
Alarms
Span I/O A
RGD (Needed for
Expansion only)
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Á
Site I/O
Exhaust Region
C-CCP Cage
ÁÁÁ
Á
Span I/O B
Á
Á
RX In (1A - 6A
and 1B - 6B)
TX Out (1 - 6)
Power Input
Connection
Expansion I/O
Housing
-48Vdc
Power Supply
Breakers
Front Cosmetic
Panel
LPA Cage
Combiner
Section
Power
Conversion
Shelf
Á
Breakers
For clarity, doors are not shown.
ti-CDMA-WP-00097-v01-ildoc-ftw
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
1-19
BTS Equipment Identification
68P09255A61-4
Figure 1-4: +27 V SC 4812T BTS Expansion Frame
Span I/O A
Site I/O
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Á
Span I/O B
Exhaust Region
C-CCP Cage
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
TX Out (1 - 6)
Expansion Port
to another BTS
Power Input
Connection
Á
LAN
Breakers
Á
LPA Cage
Combiner
Section
For clarity, doors are not shown.
ti-CDMA-WP-00110-v01-ildoc-ftw
1-20
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
BTS Equipment Identification
68P09255A61-4
Figure 1-5: -48 V SC 4812T BTS Expansion Frame
Alarms
Span I/O A
Site I/O
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Á
Á
Á
Á
ÁÁ
Á
Á
Á
Exhaust Region
C-CCP Cage
Span I/O B
TX Out (1 - 6)
Expansion Port
to another BTS
Power Input
Connection
LAN
Breakers
LPA Cage
Combiner
Section
Power
Conversion
Shelf
Á
Breakers
For clarity, doors are not shown.
ti-CDMA-WP-00109-v01-ildoc-ftw
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
1-21
BTS Equipment Identification
68P09255A61-4
BTS Frame Description
The BTS is the interface between the span lines to/from the Cellsite Base
Station Controller (CBSC) and the site antennas. This frame is described
in three sections:
 The top interconnect plate where all connections are made.
 The upper portion of the frame which houses circuit breakers, cooling
fans, and the C-CCP shelf.
 The lower portion of the frame which houses the LPA fans, LPAs, and
TX filter/combiners.
 The -48 V version of the BTS also has a section below the LPAs
containing a power conversion shelf that supplies power to the LPAs.
Use the illustrations that follow to visually identify the major
components, that make up the Motorola SC 4812T BTS frame.
Top Interconnect Plate (see Figure 1-6 or Figure 1-7)
All cabling to and from the BTS equipment frames is via the
interconnect panel on the top of each frame. Connections made here
include:
 Span lines
 RX antennas
 TX antenna
 Alarm connections
 Power input
 LAN connections
 GPS input or Remote Global Positioning System (RGPS) on the Site
I/O Board
 Remote Global Positioning System Distribution (RGD)
 LORAN-C Low Frequency Receiver (LFR) input
 Expansion frame connection
 Ground connections
 RJ-45 Pass-through Connectors
C-CCP Shelf (see Figure 1-10)
 C-CCP backplane and cage
 Power supply modules
 CDMA clock distribution (CCD) boards
 CSM and HSO/LFR boards
 Alarm Monitoring and Reporting (AMR) boards
 GLI cards (may be GLI2 or GLI3)
 MPC/EMPC boards
1-22
- MPC - starter frame only
- EMPC - expansion frames
Switch card
MCC boards (may be MCC8E, MCC24, or MCC-1X)
BBX boards (may be BBX2 or BBX-1X)
CIO boards
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
BTS Equipment Identification
68P09255A61-4
PA Shelves (see Figure 1-11 or Figure 1-12)
 LPA cages
 LPA trunking backplanes
 Single Tone Linear Power Amplifier (STLPA, or more commonly
referred to as “LPA”) modules
 LPA fan modules
 LPA Combiner Cage (+27 V BTS)
 TX filter combiners or bandpass filters
-48 V Power Conversion Shelf (see Figure 1-15)
 Power conversion backplane and shelf
 Power conversion boards
 Power conversion alarm card
 Fan modules
 Power distribution assembly
 Air plenum
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
1-23
Frame Module Location & Identification
Frame Module Location & Identification
Figure 1-6: +27 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate
RECEIVE ANTENNA
CONNECTORS
ALARM
CONNECTORS
SPAN I/O
SITE I/O
LOW FREQUENCY
RECEIVER / HSO
SPAN I/O
REAR
SPAN I/O A
ALARM B
1B
2A
SITE I/O
SPAN I/O B
TRANSMIT
ANTENNA
CONNECTORS
2B
GND
RX
3A
3B
4A
4B
5A
5B
6A
6B
LIVE TERMINALS
SPAN I/O A
LFR/
HSO
POWER INPUT
CAUTION
EXP I/O
GPS
+27 VDC
RGD
1A
LIVE TERMINALS
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ALARM A
TX OUT
SPAN I/O B
68P09255A61-4
LAN
OUT
LAN
IN
FRONT
BPR-T O-GLI
INTERCONNECT PANEL
(OPTIONAL)
GPS IN
RF EXPANSION PORT
(TO ANOTHER BTS)
LAN CONNECTIONS
ti-CDMA-WP-00114-v01-ildoc-ftw
1-24
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Frame Module Location & Identification
68P09255A61-4
Figure 1-7: -48 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate
ALARM
CONNECTORS
RECEIVE ANTENNA
CONNECTORS
SPAN I/O
SITE I/O
SPAN I/O
HSO/LFR
REAR
1B
2A
2B
3A
3B
4A
4B
5A
5B
6A
6B
RX
GND
POWER INPUT
CAUTION
EXP I/O
GPS
FRONT
Aug 2002
TRANSMIT
ANTENNA
CONNECTORS
SPAN I/O B
SITE I/O
BPR-T O-GLI
INTERCONNECT PANEL
(OPTIONAL)
HSO/
LFR
LIVE TERMINALS
RGD
SPAN I/O A
1A
LIVE TERMINALS WIRED FOR -48VDC
SPAN I/O A
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ALARM A
TX OUT
SITE I/O
SPAN I/O B
RX
ALARM B
GPS IN
LAN
OUT
LAN
IN
RF EXPANSION
PORT (TO
ANOTHER BTS)
LAN
CONNECTIONS
ti-CDMA-WP-00099-v01-ildoc-ftw
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
1-25
Frame Module Location & Identification
Figure 1-8: +27 V SC 4812T Expansion Frame I/O Plate
SPAN I/O
SITE I/O
LFR/HSO
SPAN I/O
REAR
SPAN I/O B
SPAN I/O A
TRANSMIT
ANTENNA
CONNECTORS
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
TX OUT
ALARM B
ALARM A
SPAN I/O A
SITE I/O
LFR/
HSO
GND
SPAN I/O B
LIVE TERMINALS
RGD
EXP IN
EXP IN
HOUSING
+27 VDC
POWER
INPUT
EXP OUT B
LIVE TERMINALS
68P09255A61-4
CAUTION
LAN
OUT
LAN
IN
GPS
EXP OUT
HOUSING (ADDED
ONLY WHEN
USING SECOND
EXPANSION
FRAME)
LAN
FRONT
ti-CDMA-WP-00102-v01-ildoc-ftw
RJ-45 PASS-THROUGH
CONNECTORS
1-26
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Frame Module Location & Identification
68P09255A61-4
Figure 1-9: -48 V SC 4812T Expansion Frame I/O Plate
RF FILTER PORTS NOT USED
IN EXPANSION FRAME
SPAN I/O
SPAN I/O
SITE I/O
HSO/LFR
REAR
SITE I/O
SPAN I/O B
TRANSMIT
ANTENNA
CONNECTORS
SPAN I/O A
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
SPAN I/O A
HSO/
LFR
GND
SPAN I/O B
SITE I/O
LIVE TERMINALS
RGD
ALARM A
TX OUT
ALARM B
EXP IN
LIVE TERMINALS WIRED FOR -48 VDC
EXP IN
HOUSING
POWER
INPUT
EXP OUT B
EXP OUT
HOUSING (ADDED
ONLY WHEN
USING SECOND
EXPANSION
FRAME)
CAUTION
LAN
OUT
LAN
IN
GPS
LAN
FRONT
ti-CDMA-WP-00100-v01-ildoc-ftw
RJ-45 PASS-THROUGH
CONNECTORS
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
1-27
Frame Module Location & Identification
MCC-3
MCC-4
MCC-5
MCC-6
BBX-1
BBX-2
BBX-3
BBX-4
BBX-5
BBX-6
BBX-R
MCC-9
MCC-10
MCC-1 1
MCC-12
BBX-7
BBX-8
BBX-9
BBX-10
BBX-1 1
BBX-12
Switch
MPC/EMPC-1
MCC-2
MCC-8
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Á
Á
Á Á
Á
1-28
MPC/EMPC-2
38 mm Filler Panel
CCD-2
CSM-2
CSM-1
CCD-1
CIO
GLI-1
MCC-1
MCC-7
AMR-1
GLI-2
AMR-2
PS-3
PS-2
PS-1
19 mm Filler Panel
Figure 1-10: SC 4812T C-CCP Shelf
HSO/LFR
68P09255A61-4
NOTE: MCCs may be
MCC8Es, MCC24s, or
MCC-1Xs. BBXs may
be BBX2s or BBX-1Xs.
GLIs may be GLI2s or
GLI3s.
REF
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
FW00295
Aug 2002
Frame Module Location & Identification
68P09255A61-4
Figure 1-11: +27 V SC 4812T LPA Configuration - 4 Carrier with 2:1 Combiners
FAN
MODULE
(TYPICAL)
LPA1A
LPA2A
LPA1B
LPA2B
LPA1C
LPA2C
LPA1D
FILTERS /
COMBINERS
(2 TO 1 COMBINER
SHOWN)
LPA2D
FW00296
LPA3A
LPA4A
LPA3B
LPA4B
LPA3C
LPA4C
LPA3D
LPA4D
4-CARRIER CONFIGURATION
CARRIER
CARRIER
Aug 2002
Note
No adjacent carriers may exist within the same TX filter
combiner. “Adjacent” is defined as fc1 and fc2 being
1.25 MHz apart (center-to-center). “Non-adjacent” is
defined as fc1 and fc2 being >2.50 MHz apart
(center-to-center).
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
1-29
Frame Module Location & Identification
68P09255A61-4
Figure 1-12: -48 V SC 4812T LPA Configuration - 4 Carrier, 3-Sector with 2:1 Combiners
LPA1A
LPA2A
FAN
MODULE
(TYPICAL)
LPA2B
LPA1B
LPA1C
LPA2C
LPA1D
LPA3A
LPA2D
LPA4A
LPA3B
FILTERS /
COMBINERS
(2 TO 1 COMBINER
SHOWN)
LPA3C
LPA4B
LPA4C
LPA3D
LPA4D
-48 Volt
SC 4812T
FW00481
4-CARRIER CONFIGURATION
CARRIER
CARRIER
Note
No adjacent carriers may exist within the same TX filter
combiner. “Adjacent” is defined as fc1 and fc2 being
1.25 MHz apart (center-to-center). “Non-adjacent” is
defined as fc1 and fc2 being >2.50 MHz apart
(center-to-center).
1-30
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Frame Module Location & Identification
68P09255A61-4
Sector Configuration
There are a number of ways to configure the BTS frame. Table 1-4
outlines the basic requirements. When carrier capacity is greater than
two, a 2:1 or 4:1 cavity combiner must be used. For one or two carriers,
bandpass filters or cavity combiners may be used, depending on
sectorization and channel sequencing.
Table 1-4: BTS Sector Configuration
Aug 2002
Number
of carriers
Number
of sectors
3 or 6
Channel
spacing
Filter requirements
N/A
Bandpass Filter, Cavity Combiner
(2:1 or 4:1)
Non-adjacent
Cavity Combiner (2:1 Only)
Adjacent
Not supported in single frame
Non-adjacent
Cavity Combiner (2:1 or 4:1)
Adjacent
Bandpass Filter
3,4
Non-adjacent
Cavity Combiner (2:1 or 4:1)
3,4
Adjacent
Cavity Combiner (2:1 Only)
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
1-31
Frame Module Location & Identification
NOTE
68P09255A61-4
In Table 1-5, BBXs may be BBX2s or BBX-1Xs.
Table 1-5: Sector Configurations
Config Ref. No.
Description
3-Sector/2-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with optional 2:1 cavity
combiners for 3 sectors/2 carriers for adjacent channels. Note that 2:1 cavity combiners are used (6
total).
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
TX5
TX6
Carrier#
BBX-1
BBX-2
BBX-3
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
BBX-4
BBX-5
BBX-6
6-Sector/2-NON-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with 2:1 cavity
combiners for 6 sectors/2 carriers for non-adjacent channels.
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
TX5
TX6
Carrier#
BBX-1
BBX-2
BBX-3
BBX-4
BBX-5
BBX-6
BBX-7
BBX-8
BBX-9
BBX-10
BBX-1 1
BBX-12
3-Sector/2-NON-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with 2:1 cavity
combiners for 3 sectors/2 carriers for non-adjacent channels.
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
TX5
TX6
Carrier#
BBX-1
BBX-2
BBX-3
N/A
N/A
N/A
BBX-7
BBX-8
BBX-9
N/A
N/A
N/A
3-Sector/4-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with 2:1 cavity combiners
for 3 sector/4 carriers for adjacent channels.
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
TX5
TX6
Carrier#
BBX-1
BBX-2
BBX-3
N/A
N/A
N/A
BBX-7
BBX-8
BBX-9
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
BBX-4
BBX-5
BBX-6
N/A
N/A
N/A
BBX-10
BBX-1 1
BBX-12
3-Sector / 2-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with bandpass filters for
3 sectors/2 carriers for adjacent channels.
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
BBX-1
BBX-2
BBX-3
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
BBX-7
TX5
TX6
Carrier#
N/A
N/A
BBX-8
BBX-9
3-Sector/3 or 4-NON-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with 4:1
cavity combiners for 3 sectors/3 or 4 carriers for non-adjacent channels.
1-32
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
TX5
TX6
Carrier#
BBX-1
BBX-2
BBX-3
N/A
N/A
N/A
BBX-7
BBX-8
BBX-9
N/A
N/A
N/A
BBX-4
BBX-5
BBX-6
N/A
N/A
N/A
BBX-10
BBX-1 1
BBX-12
N/A
N/A
N/A
6-Sector/1-Carrier - The configuration below maps TX with either bandpass filters or 2:1 cavity
combiners for 6 sector/1 carrier.
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
TX5
TX6
Carrier#
BBX-1
BBX-2
BBX-3
BBX-4
BBX-5
BBX-6
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Frame Module Location & Identification
68P09255A61-4
Figure 1-13: +27 V SC4812T LPA Configuration with Combiners/Filters
Note: See Table 1-5 Configuration
Reference Numbers 1, 2, 3, 4.
2 to 1 Combiner
Sector
Numbering
3 Sector
(6 Sector)
Sector
Numbering
3 Sector
(6 Sector)
3 Sector or 6 Sector
LPA 1A
C1, S1-3
(C1, S1-3)
Note: See Table 1-5 Configuration
Reference Number 6.
4 to 1 Combiner
Sector
Numbering
LPA 1A
LPA 2A
LPA 1B
LPA 2B
LPA 1C
LPA 2C
LPA 1D
C2, S1-3
(C2, S1-3)
LPA 2B
LPA 1C
LPA 2D
LPA 4B
LPA 3C
LPA 4C
LPA 3D
C4, S1-3
(C2, S4-6)
LPA 2B
6 Sector
1 Carrier Only
LPA 1B
C1, S1-3
LPA 2D
LPA 4D
LPA 1A
C2, S1-3
LPA 2C
C4, S1-3
Dual Bandpass Filter
Sector
Numbering
6 Sector
LPA 2A
LPA 1D
LPA 4C
Note: See Table 1-5 Configuration
Reference Number 7.
Sector
Numbering
3 Sector
3 Sector Only
2 Carrier Maximum
LPA 1C
LPA 4B
LPA 3C
LPA 3D
Dual Bandpass Filter
LPA 1B
LPA 4A
LPA 3B
C3, S1-3
LPA 4D
LPA 1A
C1, S1-3
LPA 3A
Note: See Table 1-5 Configuration
Reference Number 5.
Sector
Numbering
3 Sector
LPA 4A
LPA 3B
C2, S1-3
LPA 3A
C3, S1-3
(C1, S4-6)
LPA 2C
LPA 1D
LPA 2A
LPA 1B
C1, S1-3
LPA 2D
Sector
Numbering
3 Sector
LPA 1C
LPA 1D
LPA 3A
LPA 3B
C1, S4-6
LPA 3C
LPA 3D
FW00297
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
1-33
Frame Module Location & Identification
68P09255A61-4
Figure 1-14: -48 V SC4812T LPA Configuration with Combiners/Filters
Note: See Table 1-5 Configuration
Reference Numbers 1, 2, 3, 4.
2 to 1 Combiner
Sector
Numbering
3 Sector
(6 Sector)
C1, S1-3
(C1, S1-3)
LPA 1B
C2, S1-3
(C2, S1-3)
LPA 2C
LPA 1B
C1, S1-3
LPA 3A
LPA 3B
LPA 3D
C4, S1-3
(C2, S4-6)
LPA 4C
3 Sector Only
2 Carrier Maximum
LPA 1B
C1, S1-3
LPA 1D
C4, S1-3
LPA 4D
Sector
Numbering
3 Sector
Sector
Numbering
6 Sector
Dual Bandpass Filter
6 Sector
1 Carrier Only
LPA 1A
LPA 1B
LPA 2C
LPA 4C
Note: See Table 1-5 Configuration
Reference Number 7.
LPA 2B
LPA 1C
LPA 4B
LPA 2A
LPA 1A
LPA 3C
Dual Bandpass Filter
C2, S1-3
LPA 4A
LPA 3D
Note: See Table 1-5 Configuration
Reference Number 5.
Sector
Numbering
3 Sector
LPA 2C
LPA 2D
LPA 3B
C3, S1-3
LPA 4D
LPA 2B
LPA 3A
LPA 4B
LPA 3C
LPA 1C
LPA 4A
LPA 2A
LPA 1D
LPA 2D
Sector
Numbering
3 Sector
3 Sector
LPA 1A
LPA 2B
LPA 1C
4 to 1 Combiner
Sector
Numbering
3 Sector
LPA 2A
LPA 1D
C3, S1-3
(C1, S4-6)
Sector
Numbering
3 Sector
(6 Sector)
3 Sector or 6 Sector
LPA 1A
Note: See Table 1-5 Configuration
Reference Number 6.
C2, S1-3
C1, S1-3
LPA 1C
LPA 1D
LPA 2D
LPA 3A
LPA 3B
C1, S4-6
LPA 3C
LPA 3D
REF FW00482
1-34
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Frame Module Location & Identification
68P09255A61-4
Figure 1-15: -48 V BTS Power Conversion Shelf
FAN
MODULE
REAR
FAN
MODULE
REAR
FRONT
PWR/ALM
1A 30
1B
1C 30
1D
PWR/ALM
FRONT
2A 30
30
2B
2D
30
3B
3C 30
3D
4A 30
4B
4C 30
4D
PS-9
PS-8
PS-7
PS-6
PS-5
PS-4
AMR
L 2C
A 3A
FW00501
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
1-35
Frame Module Location & Identification
68P09255A61-4
Figure 1-16: CDMA (COBRA) RFDS Layout
FRONT VIEW
POWER SUPPLY
ON/OFF ROCKER
SWITCH
CASU 1
CASU 2
MMI PORT AND
PWR/ALARM LED
ESN LABEL
(FOR SC 6XX SERIES BTS)
FWTIC
Cobra RFDS external housing
(Shown With Cover off)
SUA
ESN LABEL
(FOR SC XXXX SERIES BTS)
LEDS
MMI
Cobra RFDS Field Replaceable Unit (FRU)
(shown removed from external housing)
CHASSIS GND
ELECTRICAL GND
Cobra RFDS RF connector
panel detail
(shown from rear)
FW00138
POWER
CONNECTOR
AMR-A
(RS-485 SERIAL)
1-36
AMR-B
(RS-485 SERIAL)
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
2
Chapter 2
Preliminary Operations
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
2-1
Preliminary Operations: Overview
68P09255A61-4
Preliminary Operations: Overview
Introduction
This section first verifies proper frame equipage. This includes verifying
module placement, jumper, and dual in-line package (DIP) switch
settings against the site-specific documentation supplied for each BTS
application. Next, pre-power up and initial power-up procedures are
presented.
Cell Site Types
Sites are configured as Omni with a maximum of 4 carriers, 3-sectored
with a maximum of 4 carriers, and 6-sectored with a maximum of 2
carriers. Each type has unique characteristics and must be optimized
accordingly. For more information on the differences in site types, please
refer to the BTS/Modem Frame Hardware Installation manual.
CDF
The Cell-site Data File (CDF) contains site type and equipage data
information and passes it directly to the LMF during optimization. The
number of modem frames, C-CCP shelves, BBX boards, MCC boards
(per cage), and linear power amplifier assignments are some of the
equipage data included in the CDF.
NOTE
Be sure that the correct bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf files are used
for the BTS. These should be the CDF files that are provided for
the BTS by the CBSC. Failure to use the correct CDF files can
cause system errors. Failure to use the correct CDF files to log
into a live (traffic carrying) site can shut down the site.
Site Equipage Verification
Review the site documentation. Match the site engineering equipage data
to the actual boards and modules shipped to the site. Physically inspect
and verify the equipment provided for the BTS or Modem frame and
ancillary equipment frame.
CAUTION
2-2
Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap while
handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD.
After removal, the card/module should be placed on a conductive
surface or back into the anti-static shipping bag.
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Preliminary Operations: Overview
68P09255A61-4
Initial Installation of Boards/Modules
Follow the procedure in Table 2-1 to verify the initial installation of
boards/modules.
Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules
Step
Action
Refer to the site documentation and install all boards and modules into the appropriate shelves as
required. Verify they are NOT SEATED at this time.
NOTE
On 800 MHz systems, the Switch Card has a configuration switch that must match the site
configuration (see Figure 2-1).
As the actual site hardware is installed, record the serial number of each module on a “Serial Number
Checklist” in the site logbook.
Figure 2-1: Switch Card
SHIELDS
J1
J2
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Á
Á Á
Á
J3
Switch Card
J4
J5
Configuration
Switch
NOTE:
1 2 3 4
BTS ON
MF
3 Sector
6 Sector
CONFIGURATION SWITCH ON
800 MHZ SWITCH CARD ONLY.
SHOWN FOR 3 SECTOR BTS.
SWITCH 1 CHOOSES BTS OR MF.
SWITCH 4 CHOOSES 3-SECTOR OR
6 SECTOR. SWITCHES 2 & 3 ARE NOT
USED.
FW00379
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
2-3
Preliminary Operations: Overview
68P09255A61-4
Setting Frame C-CCP Shelf Configuration Switch
The backplane switch settings behind the fan module nearest the breaker
panel should be set as shown in Figure 2-2.
The switch setting must be verified and set before power is applied to the
BTS equipment.
Figure 2-2: Backplane DIP Switch Settings - SC 4812T
STARTER
FRAME
SETTING
FAN
MODULE
FRONT
PWR/ALM
MPC
AMR / MACH
GLI2
MCC-7
MCC-8
MCC-9
MCC-10
MCC-1 1
MCC-12
BBX-7
BBX-8
BBX-9
BBX-10
BBX-1 1
BBX-12
Switch
39 mm Filter Panel
CSM
CCD
CSM
CCD
CIO
MPC
AMR / MACH
GLI2
MCC-1
MCC-2
MCC-3
MCC-4
MCC-5
MCC-6
BBX-1
BBX-2
BBX-3
BBX-4
BBX-5
BBX-6
BBX-R
Power Supply
PWR/ALM
Power Supply
Power Supply
19 mm Filter Panel
HSO
MODEM_FRAME_ID_0
MODEM_FRAME_ID_1
RIGHT / LEFT
BOTTOM / TOP
FAN MODULE
REMOVED
REAR
FRONT
EXPANSION
FRAME 2
SETTING
ON
OFF
MODEM_FRAME_ID_0
MODEM_FRAME_ID_0
MODEM_FRAME_ID_1
RIGHT / LEFT
BOTTOM / TOP
FAN
MODULE
REAR
MODEM_FRAME_ID_1
BOTTOM / TOP
EXPANSION
FRAME 1
SETTING
ON
OFF
RIGHT / LEFT
ON
OFF
REF FW00151
SC 4812T C-CCP SHELF
2-4
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Pre-Power-up Tests
68P09255A61-4
Pre-Power-up Tests
Objective
This procedure checks for any electrical short circuits and verifies the
operation and tolerances of the cellsite and BTS power supply units prior
to applying power for the first time.
Test Equipment
The following test equipment is required to complete the pre-power-up
tests:
 Digital Multimeter (DMM)
CAUTION
Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap while
handling the any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD.
Cabling Inspection
Using the site-specific documentation generated by Motorola Systems
Engineering, verify that the following cable systems are properly
connected:
NOTE
Receive RF cabling - up to 12 RX cables
Transmit RF cabling - up to six TX cables
GPS
LFR
For positive power applications (+27 V):
 The positive power cable is red.
 The negative power cable (ground) is black.
For negative power applications (-48 V):
 The negative power cable is red or blue.
 The positive power cable (ground) is black.
In all cases, the black power cable is at ground potential.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
2-5
Pre-Power-up Tests
68P09255A61-4
DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame)
Before applying any power to the BTS frame, follow the procedure in
Table 2-2 while referring to Figure 2-3 and Figure 2-4 for +27 V
systems or to Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6 for -48 V systems to verify
there are no shorts in the BTS frame DC distribution system.
Table 2-2: DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame)
Step
Action
Physically verify that all DC power sources supplying power to the frame are OFF or disabled.
On each frame:
 Unseat all circuit boards (except CCD and CIO cards) in the C-CCP shelf and LPA shelves, but
leave them in their associated slots.
 Set C-CCP shelf breakers to the OFF position by pulling out power distribution breakers (labeled
C-CCP 1, 2, 3 on the +27 V BTS C-CCP power distribution panel and labeled POWER
1,4,5,2,6,7,3,8,9 on the -48 V C-CCP power distribution panel).
 Set LPA breakers to the OFF position by pulling out the LPA breakers (8 breakers, labeled 1A-1B
through 4C-4D - located on the C-CCP power distribution panel in the +27 V BTS or on the
power conversion shelf power distribution panel in the -48 V BTS).
Verify that the resistance from the power (+ or -) feed terminals with respect to the ground terminal on
the top of the frame measures > 500 Ω (see Figure 2-3).
 If reading is < 500 Ω, a short may exist somewhere in the DC distribution path supplied by the
breaker. Isolate the problem before proceeding. A reading > 3 MΩ could indicate an open (or
missing) bleeder resistor (installed across the filter capacitors behind the breaker panel).
Set the C-CCP (POWER) breakers to the ON position by pushing them IN one at a time. Repeat
Step 3 after turning on each breaker.
NOTE
If the ohmmeter stays at 0 Ω after inserting any board/module, a short probably exists in that
board/module. Replace the suspect board/module and repeat the test. If test still fails, isolate the
problem before proceeding.
Insert and lock the DC/DC converter modules for the C-CCP shelf and into their associated slots one
at a time. Repeat Step 3 after inserting each module.
 A typical response is that the ohmmeter steadily climbs in resistance as capacitors charge, finally
indicating approximately 500 Ω.
! CAUTION
Verify the correct power/converter modules by observing the locking/retracting tabs appear as follows:
STPN4009
- PWR CONV
CDMA RCVR (in +27 V BTS C-CCP shelf)
STPN4045A
- PWR CONV CDMA RCVR (in -48 V BTS C-CCP shelf)
Insert and lock all remaining circuit boards and modules into their associated slots in the C-CCP shelf.
Repeat Step 3 after inserting and locking each board or module.
 A typical response is that the ohmmeter steadily climbs in resistance as capacitors charge, stopping
at approximately 500 Ω..
Set the LPA breakers ON by pushing them IN one at a time.
Repeat Step 3 after turning on each breaker.
 A typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,
stopping at approximately 500 Ω..
. . . continued on next page
2-6
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Pre-Power-up Tests
68P09255A61-4
Table 2-2: DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame)
Step
Action
In the -48 V BTS, insert and lock the DC/DC LPA converter modules into their associated slots one at
a time.
Repeat Step 3 after inserting each module.
 A typical response is that the ohmmeter steadily climbs in resistance as capacitors charge, finally
indicating approximately 500 Ω.
! CAUTION
Verify the correct power/converter modules by observing the locking/retracting tabs appear as follows:
STPN4044A
(in -48 V BTS power conversion shelf)
PWR CONV LPA
Seat all LPA and associated LPA fan modules into their associated slots in the shelves one at a time.
Repeat Step 3 after seating each LPA and associated LPA fan module.
 A typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,
stopping at approximately 500 Ω..
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
2-7
Pre-Power-up Tests
68P09255A61-4
Figure 2-3: +27 V BTS DC Distribution Pre-test
TOP OF FRAME
LIVE TERMINALS
2B
2C
30
2D
3A
30
3B
3C
30
3D
4A
30
4B
4C
30
4D
50
50
50
30
2A
1D
30
LIVE TERMINALS
1C
+27 VDC
1B
GND
30
CAUTION
LPA
BREAKERS
1A
LFR/
HSO
TX OUT
FW00298
POWER INPUT
C-CCP
BREAKERS
BREAKER PANEL
Breakering:
 Two LPAs on each trunking backplane breakered together
 Designed for peak LPA current of 15 amps (30 amp breakers)
 Unused TX paths do not need to be terminated
 Single feed for C-CCP
 Dual feed for LPA
. . . continued on next page
2-8
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Pre-Power-up Tests
68P09255A61-4
Figure 2-4: +27 V SC 4812T BTS Starter Frame
Span I/O A
RGD (Needed for
Expansion only)
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Á
Á
Á
ÁÁ
Site I/O
Span I/O B
Exhaust Region
C-CCP Cage
TX Out (1 - 6)
Power Input
Connection
Expansion I/O
Housing
Breakers
Á
LPA Cage
RX In (1A - 6A
and 1B - 6B)
Front Cosmetic
Panel
Combiner
Section
FW00214
For clarity, doors are not shown.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
2-9
Pre-Power-up Tests
68P09255A61-4
Figure 2-5: -48 V BTS DC Distribution Pre-test
TOP OF FRAME
LIVE TERMINALS WIRED FOR -48 VDC
LIVE TERMINALS
HSO/
LFR
GND
CAUTION
TX OUT
30
40
40
30
40
40
POWER INPUT
30
40
40
C-CCP BREAKER
1A
30
1B
1C
30
1D
2A
30
2B
2C
30
2D
3A
30
3B
3C
30
3D
4A
30
4B
4C
30
4D
LPA
BREAKER
Breakering:
 Two LPAs on each trunking backplane breakered together
 Designed for peak LPA current of 15 amps (30 A breakers)
 Unused TX paths do not need to be terminated
 Single feed for C-CCP
 Dual feed for LPA
FW00483
2-10
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Pre-Power-up Tests
68P09255A61-4
Figure 2-6: -48 V SC 4812T BTS Starter Frame
Alarms
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Á
Site I/O
Exhaust Region
C-CCP Cage
Span I/O A
RGD (Needed for
Expansion only)
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Span I/O B
RX In (1A - 6A
and 1B - 6B)
TX Out (1 - 6)
Power Input
Connection
Á
Á
Expansion I/O
Housing
Breakers
Front Cosmetic
Panel
LPA Cage
Combiner
Section
Power
Conversion
Shelf
Á
Breakers
For clarity, doors are not shown.
FW00477
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
2-11
Pre-Power-up Tests
68P09255A61-4
DC Power Pre-test (RFDS)
Before applying power to the RFDS, follow the steps in Table 2-3, while
referring to Figure 2-7, to verify there are no shorts in the RFDS DC
distribution system, backplanes, or modules/boards. As of the date of
this publication, the RFDS is not used with the -48 V BTS.
NOTE
Visual inspection of card placement and equipage for each frame
vs. site documentation must be completed, as covered in
Table 2-1 on page 2-3, before proceeding with this test.
Table 2-3: DC Power Pre-test (RFDS)
Step
Action
Physically verify that all DC/DC converters supplying the RFDS are OFF or disabled.
Set the input power rocker switch P1 to the OFF position (see Figure 2-7).
Verify the initial resistance from the power (+ or -) feed terminal with respect to ground terminal
measures > 5 kΩ , then slowly begins to increase.
 If the initial reading is < 5 kΩ and remains constant, a short exists somewhere in the DC
distribution path supplied by the breaker. Isolate the problem before proceeding.
Set the input power rocker switch P1 to the ON position.
Repeat Step 3.
Figure 2-7: DC Distribution Pre-test (COBRA RFDS Detail)
INPUT POWER
SWITCH (P1)
RFDS REAR
INTERCONNECT PANEL
“-” CONNECTOR
PIN
FRONT OF COBRA RFDS
(cut away view shown for clarity)
NOTE:
Set the input power switch ON while measuring the
resistance from the DC power - with respect to the
power + terminal on the rear of the COBRA RFDS.
CONNECTOR (MADE
UP OF A HOUSING
AND TWO PINS)
“+” CONNECTOR
PIN
FW00139
2-12
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Initial Power-up Tests
68P09255A61-4
Initial Power-up Tests
Power-up Procedures
WARNING
Potentially lethal voltage and current levels are routed to the
BTS equipment. This test must be performed with a second
person present, acting in a safety role. Remove all rings, jewelry,
and wrist watches prior to beginning this test.
DC Input Power
In the tests to follow, power will first be verified at the input to each
BTS frame. After power is verified, cards and modules within the frame
itself will be powered up and verified one at a time.
Before applying any power, verify the correct power feed and return
cables are connected between the power supply breakers and the power
connectors at the top of each BTS frame. Verify correct cable position
referring to Figure 2-3 on page 2-8 for +27 V systems and Figure 2-5
on page 2-10 for -48 V systems.
CAUTION
Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap while
handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD.
Extreme care should be taken during the removal and installation
of any card/module. After removal, the card/module should be
placed on a conductive surface or back into the anti-static bag in
which it was shipped.
NOTE
For positive power applications (+27 V):
 The positive power cable is red.
 The negative power cable (ground) is black.
For negative power applications (-48 V):
 The negative power cable is red or blue.
 The positive power cable (ground) is black.
In all cases, the black power cable is at ground potential.
Motorola recommends that the DC input power cable used to connect the
frame to the main DC power source conforms to the guidelines outlined
in Table 2-4.
Table 2-4: DC Input Power Cable Guidelines
Maximum Cable Length
NOTE
Aug 2002
Wire Size
30.38 m (100 ft)
107 mm2 (AWG #4/0)
54.864 m (180 ft)
185 mm2 (350 kcmil)
Greater that 54.864 m (180 ft)
Not recommended
If Anderson SB350 style power connectors are used, make sure
the connector adapters are securely attached to each of the BTS
power feeds and returns. Also, make sure the cables have been
properly installed into each connector.
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
2-13
Initial Power-up Tests
68P09255A61-4
Common Power Supply Verification
The procedure in Table 2-5 must be performed on any BTS frame
connected to a common power supply at the site after the common power
supply has been installed and verified per the power supply OEM
suggested procedures.
Perform the following steps to verify the power input is within
specification before powering up the individual cards/modules with the
frames themselves.
Table 2-5: Common Power Supply Verification
Step
Action
Physically verify that all DC power sources supplying the frame are OFF or disabled.
On the RFDS (for +27 V systems only), set the input power switch P1 to the OFF position (see
Figure 2-7).
On each frame:
 Unseat all circuit boards (except CCD and CIO cards) in the C-CCP shelf and LPA shelves, but
leave them in their associated slots.
 Set breakers to the OFF position by pulling out C-CCP and LPA breakers (see Figure 2-3 on
page 2-8 or Figure 2-5 on page 2-10 for breaker panel layout if required).
- C-CCP shelf breakers are labeled CCCP-1 , 2, 3 in the +27 V BTS and labeled POWER
1,4,5,2,6,7,3,8,9 in the -48 V BTS.
- LPA breakers are labeled 1A-1B through 4C-4D.
Inspect input cables, verify correct input power polarity via decal on top of frame (+27 Vdc or
-48 Vdc).
Apply power to BTS frames, one at a time, by setting the appropriate breaker in the power supply that
supplies the frame to the ON position.
After power is applied to each frame, use a digital voltmeter to verify power supply output voltages at
the top of each BTS frame are within specifications: +27.0 Vdc or -48 Vdc nominal.
2-14
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Initial Power-up Tests
68P09255A61-4
Initial Power-up (RFDS)
The procedure in Table 2-6 must be performed on the RFDS after input
power from the common power supply has been verified. Perform the
following steps to apply initial power to the cards/modules within the
frame itself, verifying that each is operating within specification.
NOTE
Visual inspection of card placement and equipage for each frame
vs. site documentation must be completed, as covered in
Table 2-1, on page 2-3, before proceeding with this test.
Table 2-6: Initial Power-up (RFDS)
Step
Action
On the RFDS, set the input power rocker switch (P1) to the ON position (see Figure 2-7).
Verify power supply output voltages (at the top of BTS frame), using a digital voltmeter, are within
specifications: +27.0 V nominal.
Initial Power-up (BTS)
The procedure must be performed on each frame after input power from
the common power supply has been verified. Follow the steps in
Table 2-7 to apply initial power to the cards/modules within the frame
itself, verifying that each is operating within specification.
Table 2-7: Initial Power-up (BTS)
Step
Action
At the BTS, set the C-CCP (POWER) power distribution breakers (see Figure 2-3 on page 2-8 or
Figure 2-5 on page 2-10) to the ON position by pushing in the breakers.
Insert the C-CCP fan modules. Observe that the fan modules come on line.
! CAUTION
Verify the correct power/converter modules by observing the locking/retracting tabs appear as follows:
STPN4009
- PWR CONV
CDMA RCVR (in +27 V BTS C-CCP shelf)
STPN 4045A
- PWR CONV CDMA RCVR (in -48 V BTS C-CCP shelf)
STPN 4044A
- PWR
(in -48 V BTS power conversion shelf)
CONV LPA
Insert and lock the converter/power supplies into their associated slots one at a time.
• If no boards have been inserted, all three PWR/ALM LEDs would indicate RED to notify the user
that there is no load on the power supplies.
- If the LED is RED, do not be alarmed. After Step 4 is performed, the LEDs should turn GREEN;
if not, then a faulty converter/power supply module is indicated and should be replaced before
proceeding.
Seat and lock all remaining circuit cards and modules in the C-CCP shelf into their associated slots.
Seat the first equipped LPA module pair into the assigned slot in the upper LPA shelf including LPA
fan.
 In +27 V systems, observe that the LPA internal fan comes on line.
Repeat step 5 for all remaining LPAs.
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
2-15
Initial Power-up Tests
68P09255A61-4
Table 2-7: Initial Power-up (BTS)
Step
Action
Set the LPA breakers to the ON position (per configuration) by pushing them IN one at a time. See
Figure 1-13 on page 1-33 or Figure 1-14 on page 1-34 for configurations and Figure 2-3 on page 2-8
or Figure 2-5 on page 2-10 for LPA breaker panel layout.
On +27 V frames, engage (push) LPA circuit breakers.
 Confirm LEDs on LPAs light.
On -48 V frames, engage (push) LPA PS circuit breakers.
Confirm LPA PS fans start.
Confirm LEDs on -48 V power converter boards light.
Confirm LPA fans start.
Confirm LEDs on LPAs light.
After all cards/modules have been seated and verified, use a digital voltmeter to verify power supply
output voltages at the top of the frame remain within specifications: +27.0 Vdc or -48 Vdc nominal.
Repeat Steps 1 through 8 for additional co-located frames (if equipped).
2-16
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
3
Chapter 3
Optimization/Calibration
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-1
Optimization/Calibration - Introduction
68P09255A61-4
Optimization/Calibration - Introduction
Introduction
This section describes procedures for isolating the BTS from the span
lines, preparing and using the LMF, downloading system operating
software, CSM reference verification/optimization, set up and calibration
of the supported test equipment, transmit/receive path verification, using
the RFDS, and verifying the customer defined alarms and relay contacts
are functioning properly.
NOTE
Before using the LMF, use an editor to view the “CAVEATS”
section in the “readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmf folder for any
applicable information.
Optimization Process
After a BTS is physically installed and the preliminary operations
(power up) have been completed, use the LMF to calibrate and optimize
the BTS. Motorola recommends that the optimization be accomplished
as follows:
1. Download MGLI-1 with code and data and then enable MGLI-1.
NOTE
GLIs may be GLI2s or GLI3s.
2. Use the status function and verify that all of the installed devices of
the following types respond with status information: CSM, BBX,
GLI, MCC, and TSU (if RFDS is installed). If a device is installed
and powered up but is not responding and is colored gray in the BTS
display, the device is not listed in the CDF file. The CDF file must
be corrected before the device can be accessed by the LMF.
3. Download code and data to all devices of the following types:
- CSM
- BBX (may be BBX2 or BBX-1X)
- GLI (other than MGLI-1)
- MCC (may be MCC-8E, MCC24, or MCC-1X)
4. Download the RFDS TSIC (if installed).
5. Verify the operation of the GPS and HSO or LFR signals.
6. Enable the following devices (in the order listed):
- Secondary CSM
- Primary CSM
- All MCCs
7. Connect the required test equipment for a full optimization.
8. Select the test equipment.
9. Calibrate the TX and RX test cables if they have not previously been
calibrated using the CDMA LMF that will be used for the
optimization/calibration. The cable calibration values can also be
entered manually.
3-2
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Optimization/Calibration - Introduction
68P09255A61-4
10. Select all of the BBXs and all of the MCCs, and use the full
optimization function. The full optimization function performs TX
calibration, BLO download, TX audit, all TX tests, and all RX tests
for all selected devices.
11. If the TX calibration fails, repeat the full optimization for any failed
paths.
12. If the TX calibration fails again, correct the problem that caused the
failure and repeat the full optimization for the failed path.
13. If the TX calibration and audit portion of the full optimization passes
for a path but some of the TX or RX tests fail, correct the problem
that caused the failure and run the individual tests as required until
all TX and RX tests have passed for all paths.
Site Types
Sites are configured as Omni/Omni or Sector/Sector (TX/RX). Each type
has unique characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.
NOTE
For more information on the differences in site types, please
refer to the applicable BTS/Modem Frame Hardware Installation
and Functional Hardware Description manuals.
Cell-Site Data File
The Cell-Site Data File (CDF) contains information that defines the
BTS and data used to download files to the devices. A CDF file must be
placed in the applicable BTS folder before the LMF can be used to log
into that BTS. CDF files are normally obtained from the CBSC using a
floppy disk. A file transfer protocol (ftp) method can be used if the LMF
computer has that capability.
The CDF includes the following information:
 Download instructions and protocol
 Site specific equipage information
 C-CCP shelf allocation plan
- BBX equipage (based on cell-site type) including redundancy
- CSM equipage including redundancy
- MCC (MCC24E, MCC8E, or MCC-1X) channel element allocation
plan. This plan indicates how the C-CCP shelf is configured, and
how the paging, synchronization, traffic, and access channel
elements (and associated gain values) are assigned among the (up to
12) MCCs in the shelf.
 CSM equipage including redundancy
 Effective Rated Power (ERP) table for all TX channels to antennas
respectively. Motorola System Engineering specifies the ERP of a
transmit antenna based on site geography, antenna placement, and
government regulations. Working from this ERP requirement, the
antenna gain, (dependent on the units of measurement specified) and
antenna feed line loss can be combined to determine the required
power at the top of the BTS frame. The corresponding BBX output
level required to achieve that power level on any channel/sector can
also be determined.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-3
Optimization/Calibration - Introduction
NOTE
68P09255A61-4
Refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide for additional
information on the layout of the LMF directory structure
(including CDF file locations and formats).
BTS System Software Download
BTS system software must be successfully downloaded to the BTS
processor boards before optimization can be performed. BTS operating
code is loaded from the LMF computer terminal.
NOTE
Before using the LMF for optimization/ATP, the correct
bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf files for the BTS must be obtained
from the CBSC and put in a bts-# folder in the LMF. Failure to
use the correct CDF files can cause wrong results. Failure to use
the correct CDF files to log into a live (traffic carrying) site
can shut down the site.
The CDF is normally obtained from the CBSC on a DOS formatted
diskette, or through a file transfer protocol (ftp) if the LMF computer has
ftp capability. Refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide, or the LMF
Help screen, for the procedure.
Site Equipage Verification
If you have not already done so, use an editor to view the CDF, and
review the site documentation. Verify the site engineering equipage data
in the CDF matches the actual site hardware using a CDF conversion
table.
CAUTION
3-4
Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap while
handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD.
Extreme care should be taken during the removal and installation
of any card/module. After removal, the card/module should be
placed on a conductive surface or back into the anti-static bag in
which it was shipped.
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Isolate Span Lines/Connect LMF
68P09255A61-4
Isolate Span Lines/Connect LMF
Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans
NOTE
At active sites, the OMC/CBSC must disable the BTS and place
it out of service (OOS). DO NOT remove the 50-pin TELCO
cable connected to the BTS frame site I/O board J1 connector
until the OMC/CBSC has disabled the BTS!
Each frame is equipped with one Site I/O and two Span I/O boards. The
Span I/O J1 connector provides connection of 25 pairs of wire. A GLI
card can support up to six spans. In the SC 4812T configuration, the odd
spans (1, 3, and 5) terminate on the Span “A” I/O; and the even spans (2,
4, and 6) terminate on the Span “B” I/O.
Before connecting the LMF to the frame LAN, the OMC/CBSC must
disable the BTS and place it OOS to allow the LMF to control the
CDMA BTS. This prevents the CBSC from inadvertently sending
control information to the CDMA BTS during LMF based tests. Refer to
Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2 as required.
Table 3-1: T1/E1 Span Isolation
Step
Action
From the OMC/CBSC, disable the BTS and place it OOS. Refer to SC OMC-R/CBSC System
Operator Procedures.
- The T1/E1 span 50-pin TELCO cable connected to the BTS frame SPAN I/O board J1 connector
can be removed from both Span I/O boards, if equipped, to isolate the spans.
NOTE
If a third party is used for span connectivity, the third party must be informed before disconnecting the
span line.
Verify that you remove the SPAN cable, not the “MODEM/TELCO” connector.
Figure 3-1: Span I/O Board T1 Span Isolation
50-PIN TELCO
CONNECTORS
REMOVED
SPAN A CONNECTOR
(TELCO) INTERFACE
TO SPAN LINES
SPAN B CONNECTOR
(TELCO) INTERFACE
TO SPAN LINES
RS-232 9-PIN SUB D
CONNECTOR SERIAL
PORT FOR EXTERNAL
DIAL UP MODEM
CONNECTION (IF USED)
TOP of Frame
(Site I/O and Span I/O boards)
FW00299
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-5
Isolate Span Lines/Connect LMF
68P09255A61-4
LMF to BTS Connection
The LMF is connected to the LAN A or B connector located on the left
side of the frame’s lower air intake grill, behind the LAN Cable Access
door (see Figure 3-2).
Table 3-2: LMF to BTS Connection
Step
Action
To gain access to the connectors on the BTS, open the LAN Cable Access door, then pull apart the
Velcro tape covering the BNC “T” connector (see Figure 3-2).
Connect the LMF to the LAN A BNC connector via PCMCIA Ethernet Adapter with an unshielded
twisted-pair (UTP) Adapter and 10BaseT/10Base2 converter (powered by an external AC/DC
transformer).
- If there is no login response, connect the LMF to the LAN B connector.
- If there is still no login response, see Table 6-1, Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures.
NOTE
- Xircom Model PE3-10B2 or equivalent can also be used to interface the LMF Ethernet
connection to the frame connected to the PC parallel port, powered by an external AC/DC
transformer. In this case, the BNC cable must not exceed 91 cm (3 ft) in length.
! CAUTION
- The LAN shield is isolated from chassis ground. The LAN shield (exposed portion of BNC
connector) must not touch the chassis during optimization.
Figure 3-2: LMF Connection Detail
NOTE:
Open LAN CABLE ACCESS
door. Pull apart Velcro tape and
gain access to the LAN A or LAN
B LMF BNC connector.
Á
ÁÁÁ
Á
LMF BNC “T” CONNECTIONS
ON LEFT SIDE OF FRAME
(ETHERNET “A” SHOWN;
ETHERNET “B” COVERED
WITH VELCRO TAPE)
10BASET/10BASE2
CONVERTER CONNECTS
DIRECTLY TO BNC T
LMF COMPUTER
TERMINAL WITH
MOUSE
3-6
PCMCIA ETHERNET
ADPATER & ETHERNET
UTP ADAPTER
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE (RJ11
CONNECTORS)
115 VAC POWER
CONNECTION
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
FW00140
Aug 2002
Preparing the LMF
68P09255A61-4
Preparing the LMF
Overview
Software and files for installation and updating of the LMF are provided
on CD ROM disks. The following installation items must be available:
 LMF Program on CD ROM
 CDF for each supported BTS (on diskette or available from the
CBSC)
 CBSC File for each supported BTS (on diskette or available from the
CBSC)
The following section provides information and instructions for
installing and updating the LMF software and files.
NOTE
For the CDMA LMF graphics to display properly, the computer
platform must be configured to display more than 256 colors.
See the operating system software instructions for verifying and
configuring the display settings.
CDMA LMF Home Directory
The CDMA LMF installation program creates the default home
directory, c:\wlmf, and installs the application files and subdirectories
(folders) in it. Because this can be changed at installation, the CDMA
LMF home directory will be referred to with the generic convention of:
:\
Where:
 = the LMF computer drive letter where the CDMA LMF home
directory is located
 = the directory path or name where the CDMA
LMF is installed.”
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-7
Preparing the LMF
68P09255A61-4
LMF Operating System Installation
Follow the procedure in Table 3-3 to install the LMF operating system.
Table 3-3: LMF Operating System Installation
 Step
Action
Insert the LMF Program CD ROM into the LMF CD ROM drive.
- If the Setup screen is displayed, go to step 5.
- If the Setup screen is not displayed, proceed to step 2.
Click on the Start button.
Select Run.
In the Open box, enter d:\autorun and click on the OK button.
NOTE
If applicable, replace the letter d with the correct CD ROM drive letter.
Follow the instructions displayed on the Setup screen.
NOTE
First Time Installations:
- Install U/WIN (First)
- Install Java Runtime Environment (Second)
- Install LMF Software (Third)
- Install/Create BTS Folders (Fourth)
Any time you install U/WIN, you must install the LMF software because the installation of the
LMF modifies some of the files that are installed during the U/Win installation. Installing U/Win
over-writes these modifications.
NOTE
There are multiple binary image packages for installation on the CD-ROM. When prompted,
choose the load that corresponds to the switch release that you currently have installed. Perform
the Device Images install after the WinLMF installation.
If applicable, a separate CD ROM of BTS Binaries may be available for binary updates.
Copy CDF Files from CBSC
Before the LMF can execute the optimization/ATP procedures for the
BTS, the correct bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf files must be
obtained from the CBSC and put in a bts-# folder in the LMF
notebook. This requires copying the CBSC CDF files to a DOS
formatted diskette, and using the diskette to install the CDF file in the
LMF.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-4 to obtain the CDF files from the
CBSC and copy the files to a diskette. For any further information, refer
to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide or the LMF Help screen.
3-8
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Preparing the LMF
68P09255A61-4
NOTE
If the LMF has ftp capability, the ftp method can be used to copy
the CDF files from the CBSC.
On Sun OS workstations, the unix2dos command can be used in
place of the cp command (e.g., unix2dos bts-248.cdf
bts-248.cdf). This should be done using a copy of the CBSC
CDF file so the original CBSC CDF file is not changed to DOS
format.
When copying CDF files, comply with the following to prevent
BTS login problems with the LMF:
- The numbers used in the bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf
filenames must correspond to the locally assigned numbers
for each BTS and its controlling CBSC.
- The generic cbsc-1.cdf file supplied with the LMF works
with locally numbered BTS CDF files. Using this file does
not provide a valid optimization unless the generic file is
edited to replace default parameters (e.g., channel numbers)
with the operational parameters used locally.
Table 3-4: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF
 Step
Action
AT THE CBSC:
Login to the CBSC workstation.
Insert a DOS formatted diskette in the workstation drive.
Type eject -q and press the  key.
Type mount and press the  key.
NOTE
 Look for the “floppy/no_name” message on the last line displayed.
 If the eject command was previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a
number. Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed when performing step 7.
Change to the directory containing the file by typing cd  (ex. cd
bts-248 ) and pressing .
Type ls  to display the list of files in the directory.
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-9
Preparing the LMF
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-4: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF
 Step
Action
With Solaris versions of Unix, create DOS-formatted versions of the bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf
files on the diskette by entering the following command:
unix2dos  /floppy/no_name/
(e.g., unix2dos bts-248.cdf /floppy/no_name/bts-248.cdf).
NOTE
 Other versions of Unix do not support the unix2dos and dos2unix commands. In these cases,
use the Unix cp (copy) command. The copied files will be difficult to read with a DOS or
Windows text editor because Unix files do not contain line feed characters. Editing copied CDF
files on the LMF computer is, therefore, not recommended.
 Using cp, multiple files can be copied in one operation by separating each filename to be copied
with a space and ensuring the destination directory (floppy/no_name) is listed at the end of the
command string following a space (e.g., cp bts-248.cdf cbsc-6.cdf /floppy/na_name).
Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each bts-# that must be supported by the LMF.
When all required files have been copied to the diskette, type eject and press the  key.
10
Remove the diskette from the CBSC.
AT THE LMF:
11
Start the Windows operating system.
12
Insert the diskette into the LMF.
13
Using Windows Explorer (or equivalent program), create a corresponding bts-# folder in the
\cdma directory for each bts-#.cdf/cbsc-#.cdf file pair copied from the
CBSC.
14
Use Windows Explorer (or equivalent program) to transfer the cbsc-#.cdf and bts-#.cdf files from
the diskette to the corresponding \cdma\bts-# folders created in step 13.
Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI Connection
Confirming or changing the configuration data of certain BTS Field
Replaceable Units (FRUs) requires establishing an MMI communication
session between the LMF and the FRU. Using features of the Windows
operating system, the connection properties for an MMI session can be
saved on the LMF computer as a named Windows HyperTerminal
connection. This eliminates the need for setting up connection
parameters each time an MMI session is required to support
optimization.
Once the named connection is saved, a shortcut for it can be created on
the Windows desktop. Double clicking the shortcut icon will start the
connection without the need to negotiate multiple menu levels.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-5 to establish a named HyperTerminal
connection and create a WIndows desktop shortcut for it.
3-10
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Preparing the LMF
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-5: Creating a Named Hyperlink Connection for MMI Connection
Step
Action
From the Windows Start menu, select:
Programs>Accessories
Select Communications, double click the Hyperterminal folder, and then double click on the
Hyperterm.exe icon in the window that opens.
NOTE
 If a Location Information Window appears, enter the required information, then click Close.
(This is required the first time, even if a modem is not to be used.)
 If a You need to install a modem..... message appears, click NO.
When the Connection Description box opens:
- Type a name for the connection being defined (e.g., MMI Session) in the Name: window.
- Highlight any icon preferred for the named connection in the Icon: chooser window.
- Click OK.
NOTE
For LMF configurations where COM1 is used by another interface such as test equipment and a
physical port is available for COM2, select COM2 to prevent conflicts.
From the Connect using: pick list in the Connect To box displayed, select the RS-232 port to be used
for the connection (e.g., COM1 or COM2 (Win NT) - or Direct to Com 1 or Direct to Com 2 (Win
98), and click OK.
In the Port Settings tab of the COM# Properties window displayed, configure the RS-232 port
settings as follows:
Bits per second: 9600
Data bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop bits: 1
Flow control: None
Click OK.
Save the defined connection by selecting:
File>Save
Close the HyperTerminal window by selecting:
File>Exit
Click Yes to disconnect when prompted.
10
Perform one of the following:
 If the Hyperterminal folder window is still open (Win 98) proceed to step 12
 From the Windows Start menu, select Programs > Accessories.
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-11
Preparing the LMF
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-5: Creating a Named Hyperlink Connection for MMI Connection
Step
11
Action
Perform one of the following:
 For Win NT, select Hyperterminal and release any pressed mouse buttons.
 For Win 98, select Communications and double click the Hyperterminal folder.
12
Highlight the newly created connection icon by moving the cursor over it (Win NT) or clicking on it
(Win 98).
13
Right click and drag the highlighted connection icon to the Windows desktop and release the right
mouse button.
14
From the pop-up menu displayed, select Create Shortcut(s) Here.
15
If desired, reposition the shortcut icon for the new connection by dragging it to another location on the
Windows desktop.
Folder Structure Overview
The LMF uses an  folder that contains all of the
essential data for installing and maintaining the BTS. The list that
follows outlines the folder structure for the LMF. Except for the bts-nnn
folders, these folders are created as part of the the LMF installation.
Refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide for a complete description of
the folder structure.
Figure 3-3: LMF Folder Structure
(C:)
x:\ folder
cdma folder
BTS-nnn folders (A separate folder is
required for each BTS where bts-nnn is the
unique BTS number; for example, bts-163.)
loads folder
version folder (A separate folder is
required for each different version; for
example, a folder name 2.8.1.1.1.5.)
code folder
data folder
NOTE
3-12
The “loads” folder and all the folders below it are not available
from the LMF for Software Release 2.16.1.x. These folders may
be present as as a legacy from previous software versions or
downloaded from the CBSC/OMC-R.
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Preparing the LMF
68P09255A61-4
Pinging the Processors
For proper operation, the integrity of the Ethernet LAN A and B links
must be be verified. Figure 3-4 represents a typical BTS Ethernet
configuration. The drawing depicts one (of two identical) links, A and B.
Ping is a program that routes request packets to the LAN network
modules to obtain a response from the specified “targeted” BTS.
Figure 3-4: BTS LAN Interconnect Diagram
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
50Ω
50Ω
C-CCP
CAGE
SIGNAL
GROUND
C-CCP
CAGE
IN
OUT
OUT
LMF CONNECTOR
SIGNAL
GROUND
IN
CHASSIS
GROUND
BTS
(MASTER)
BTS
(EXPANSION)
FW00141
Follow the procedure in Table 3-6 and refer to Figure 3-5 or Figure 3-6,
as required, to ping each processor (on both LAN A and LAN B) and
verify LAN redundancy is operating correctly.
Aug 2002
CAUTION
Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap while
handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD.
NOTE
The Ethernet LAN A and B cables must be installed on each
frame/enclosure before performing this test. All other processor
board LAN connections are made via the backplanes.
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-13
Preparing the LMF
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-6: Pinging the Processors
 Step
Action
If you have not already done so, connect the LMF to the BTS (see Table 3-2 on page 3-6).
From the Windows desktop, click the Start button and select Run.
In the Open box, type ping and the  (for example, ping 128.0.0.2).
NOTE
128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for MGLI-1 in field BTS units. 128.0.0.1 is the default IP
address for MGLI-2.
Click on the OK button.
If the connection is successful, text similar to the following is displayed:
Reply from 128 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255
If there is no response the following is displayed:
Request timed out
If the MGLI fails to respond, reset and perform the ping process again. If the MGLI still fails to
respond, typical problems are shorted BNC to inter-frame cabling, open cables, crossed A and B
link cables, missing 50-Ohm terminators, or the MGLI itself.
3-14
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Preparing the LMF
68P09255A61-4
Figure 3-5: +27 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate
REAR
SPAN I/O A
1B
2A
SPAN I/O B
SITE I/O
2B
GND
RX
3A
3B
4A
4B
5A
5B
6A
6B
LIVE TERMINALS
SPAN I/O A
LFR/
HSO
+27 VDC
RGD
1A
LIVE TERMINALS
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ALARM A
TX OUT
SPAN I/O B
ALARM B
CAUTION
EXP I/O
GPS
LAN
OUT
LAN
IN
FRONT
BPR-T O-GLI
INTERCONNECT PANEL
(OPTIONAL)
Aug 2002
ETHERNET CONNECTORS
WITH 50-OHM TERMINATORS
ti-CDMA-WP-00114-v01-ildoc-ftw
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-15
Preparing the LMF
68P09255A61-4
Figure 3-6: -48 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate
REAR
RX
1B
HSO/
LFR
2A
2B
3A
3B
GND
SPAN I/O B
SITE I/O
4A
4B
5A
5B
6A
6B
RX
LIVE TERMINALS
RGD
SPAN I/O A
1A
LIVE TERMINALS WIRED FOR -48VDC
SPAN I/O A
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ALARM A
TX OUT
SITE I/O
SPAN I/O B
ALARM B
CAUTION
EXP I/O
GPS
LAN
OUT
LAN
IN
FRONT
BPR-T O-GLI
INTERCONNECT PANEL
(OPTIONAL)
3-16
ETHERNET CONNECTORS
WITH 50-OHM TERMINATORS
ti-CDMA-WP-00099-v01-ildoc-ftw
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Using CDMA LMF
68P09255A61-4
Using CDMA LMF
Basic LMF Operation
The CDMA LMF allows the user to work in the two following operating
environments, which are accessed using the specified desktop icon:
 Graphical User Interface (GUI) using the WinLMF icon
 Command Line Interface (CLI) using the WinLMF CLI icon
The GUI is the primary optimization and acceptance testing operating
environment. The CLI environment provides additional capability to the
user to perform manually controlled acceptance tests and audit the
results of optimization and calibration actions.
Basic operation of the LMF GUI includes the following:
Selecting and deselecting BTS devices
Enabling devices
Disabling devices
Resetting devices
Obtaining device status
Sorting a status report window
For detailed information on performing these and other LMF operations,
refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide.
Graphical User Interface Overview
The LMF uses a GUI, which works in the following way:
 Select the device or devices.
 Select the action to apply to the selected device(s).
 While action is in progress, a status report window displays the action
taking place and other status information.
 The status report window indicates when the the action is complete
and displays other pertinent information.
 Clicking the OK button closes the status report window.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-17
Using CDMA LMF
68P09255A61-4
Command Line Interface Overview
The LMF also provides Command Line Interface (CLI) capability.
Activate the CLI by clicking on a shortcut icon on the desktop. The CLI
can not be launched from the GUI, only from the desktop icon.
Both the GUI and the CLI use a program known as the handler. Only one
handler can be running at one time Due to architectural limitations, the
GUI must be started before the CLI if you want the GUI and CLI to use
the same handler. When the CLI is launched after the GUI, the CLI
automatically finds and uses an in-progress login session with a BTS
initiated under the GUI. This allows the use of the GUI and the CLI in
the same BTS login session. If a CLI handler is already running when
the GUI is launched (this happens if the CLI window is already running
when the user starts the GUI, or if another copy of the GUI is already
running when the user starts the GUI), a dialog window displays the
following warning message:
The CLI handler is already running.
This may cause conflicts with the LMF.
Are you sure that you want to start the application?
This window also contains yes and no buttons. Selecting yes starts the
application. Selecting no terminates the application.
CLI Format Conventions
The CLI command can be broken down in the following way:
verb
device including device identifier parameters
switch
option parameters consisting of:
- keywords
- equals signs (=) between the keywords and the parameter values
- parameter values
Spaces are required between the verb, device, switch, and option
parameters. A hyphen is required between the device and its identifiers.
Following is an example of a CLI command.
measure bbx--  rssi channel=6 sector=5
Refer to LMF CLI Commands for a complete explanation of the CLI
commands and their usage.
3-18
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Using CDMA LMF
68P09255A61-4
Logging into a BTS
NOTE
Be sure that the correct bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf file is used for
the BTS. These should be the CDF files that are provided for the
BTS by the CBSC. Failure to use the correct CDF files can
result in invalid optimization. Failure to use the correct CDF
files to log into a live (traffic carrying) site can shut down the
site.
Logging into a BTS establishes a communications link between the BTS
and the CDMA LMF. You may be logged into more than one BTS at a
time, but only one LMF may be logged into each BTS.
Before attempting to log into the BTS, confirm the CDMA LMF is
properly connected to the BTS (see Figure 3-2).
Prerequisites
Before attempting to login to a BTS, ensure the following have been
completed:
 The LMF operating system is correctly installed and prepared.
 A bts-nnn folder with the correct CDF and CBSC file exists.
 The LMF is correctly installed and prepared, and the LMF computer is
connected to the BTS before starting the Windows operating system
and LMF software. If necessary, restart the computer after connecting
it to the BTS (see Table 3-2 and Figure 3-2).
BTS Login from the GUI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-7 to log into a BTS when using the GUI
environment.
Table 3-7: BTS GUI Login Procedure
Step
Action
Start the CDMA LMF GUI environment by double clicking on the WinLMF desktop icon (if the LMF
is not running).
NOTE
If a warning similar to the following is displayed, select No, shut down other LMF sessions which
may be running, and start the CDMA LMF GUI environment again:
The CLI handler is already running.
This may cause conflicts with the LMF
Are you sure you want to start the application?
Yes
No
Click on the Login tab (if not displayed).
If no base stations are displayed in the Available Base Stations pick list, double click on the CDMA
icon.
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-19
Using CDMA LMF
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-7: BTS GUI Login Procedure
Step
Action
Click on the desired BTS number.
Click on the Network Login tab (if not already in the forefront).
Enter the correct IP address (normally 128.0.0.2 for a field BTS) if not correctly displayed in the IP
Address box.
NOTE
128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for MGLI-1 in field BTS units. 128.0.0.1 is the default IP address
for MGLI-2.
Type in the correct IP Port number (normally 9216) if not correctly displayed in the IP Port box.
Click on Ping.
- If the connection is successful, the Ping Display window shows text similar to the following:
Reply from 128 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255
- If there is no response the following is displayed:
128.0.0.2:9216:Timed out
If the MGLI fails to respond, reset and perform the ping process again. If the MGLI still fails to
respond, typical problems are shorted BNC to inter-frame cabling, open cables, crossed A and B link
cables, missing 50-Ohm terminators, or the MGLI itself.
Change the Multi-Channel Preselector (from the Multi-Channel Preselector pick list), normally
MPC, corresponding to your BTS configuration, if required.
NOTE
When performing RX tests on expansion frames, do not choose EMPC if the test equipment is
connected to the starter frame.
10
Click on the Use a Tower Top Amplifier, if applicable.
11
Click on Login.
A BTS tab with the BTS is displayed.
NOTE
 If you attempt to login to a BTS that is already logged on, all devices will be gray.
 There may be instances where the BTS initiates a log out due to a system error (i.e., a device
failure).
 If the MGLI is OOS_ROM (blue), it will have to be downloaded with code before other devices can
be seen.
 If the MGLI is OOS-RAM (yellow), it must be enabled before other installed devices can be seen.
3-20
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Using CDMA LMF
68P09255A61-4
BTS Login from the CLI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-8 to log into a BTS when using the CLI
environment.
NOTE
The GUI and CLI environments use the same connection to a
BTS. If a GUI and the CLI session are running for the same BTS
at the same time, logging out of the BTS in either environment
will log out of it for both. When either a login or logout is
performed in the CLI window, there is no GUI indication that
logout has occurred.
Table 3-8: BTS CLI Login Procedure
Step
Action
Double click the WinLMF CLI desktop icon (if the LMF CLI environment is not already running).
NOTE
If a BTS was logged into under a GUI session when the CLI environment was started, the CLI session
will be logged into the same BTS, and step 2 is not required.
At the /wlmf prompt, enter the following command:
login bts- host= port=
where:
host = MGLI card IP address (defaults to address last logged into for this BTS or 128.0.0.2 if this is
first login to this BTS).
port = IP port of the BTS (defaults to port last logged into for this BTS or 9216 if this is first login to
this BTS).
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
LMF>
13:08:18.882 Command Received and Accepted
COMMAND=login bts-33
13:08:18.882 Command In Progress
13:08:21.275 Command Successfully Completed
REASON_CODE=”No Reason”
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-21
Using CDMA LMF
68P09255A61-4
Logging Out
Logging out of a BTS is accomplished differently for the GUI and the
CLI operating environments.
NOTE
The GUI and CLI environments use the same connection to a
BTS. If a GUI and the CLI session are running for the same BTS
at the same time, logging out of the BTS in either environment
will log out of it for both. When either a login or logout is
performed in the CLI window, there is no GUI indication that
logout has occurred.
Logging Out of a BTS from the GUI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-9 to logout of a BTS when using the
GUI environment.
Table 3-9: BTS GUI Logout Procedure
Step
Action
Click on BTS on the BTS tab menu bar.
Click the Logout item in the pull-down menu.
A Confirm Logout pop-up message appears.
Click on Yes or press the  key to confirm logout.
You are returned to the Login tab.
NOTE
If a logout was previously performed on the BTS from a CLI window running at the same time as the
GUI, a Logout Error pop-up message appears stating the system should not log out of the BTS.
When this occurs, the GUI must be exited and restarted before it can be used for further operations.
If a Logout Error pop-up message appears stating that the system could not log out of the Base
Station because the given BTS is not logged in, perform the following actions:
- Click OK.
- Select File>Exit in the window menu bar.
- Click Yes in the Confirm Logout pop-up.
- Click Yes in the Logout Error pop-up which appears again.
If further work is to be done in the GUI, restart it.
NOTE
 The Logout item on the BTS menu bar will only log you out of the displayed BTS.
 You can also log out of all BTS sessions and exit LMF by clicking on the File selection in the menu
bar and selecting Exit from the File menu list. A Confirm Logout pop-up message will appear.
3-22
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Using CDMA LMF
68P09255A61-4
Logging Out of a BTS from the CLI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-9 to logout of a BTS when using the
CLI environment.
Table 3-10: BTS CLI Logout Procedure
Step
Action
NOTE
If the BTS is also logged into from a GUI running at the same time and further work must be done
with it in the GUI, proceed to step 2.
Logout of a BTS by entering the following command:
logout bts-
A response similar to the following is displayed:
LMF>
12:22:58.028 Command Received and Accepted
Command=logout bts-33
12:22:58.028 Command Received and Accepted
12:22:58.028 Command Successfully Completed
REASON_CODE=”No Reason”
If desired, close the CLI interface by entering the following command:
exit
A response similar to the following is displayed before the window closes:
Killing background processes....
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-23
Using CDMA LMF
68P09255A61-4
Establishing an MMI Communication Session
For those procedures that require MMI communications between the
LMF and BTS FRUs, follow the procedure in Table 3-11 to initiate the
communication session.
NOTE
If the LMF GUI is running and the LMF is logged into a BTS,
the LMF cannot initiate a hyperterminal session on the COM
port normally used to communicate with the test equipment.
Also, if the LMF has only one COM port, you cannot operate
test equipment and have a hyperterminal session running at the
same time.
Table 3-11: Establishing MMI Communications
Step
Action
Connect the LMF computer to the equipment as detailed in the applicable procedure that requires the
MMI communication session.
Start the named HyperTerminal connection for MMI sessions by double clicking on its desktop
shortcut.
NOTE
If a desktop shortcut was not created for the MMI connection, access the connection from the Start
menu by selecting:
Programs>Accessories>Hyperterminal>HyperTerminal> key until the prompt identified in the applicable procedure is obtained.
Figure 3-7: CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI Connections
To FRU MMI port
8-PIN
NULL MODEM
BOARD
(TRN9666A)
8-PIN TO 10-PIN
RS-232 CABLE
(P/N 30-09786R01)
CDMA LMF
COMPUTER
RS-232 CABLE
COM1
OR
COM2
DB9-TO-DB25
ADAPTER
FW00687
3-24
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Download the BTS
68P09255A61-4
Download the BTS
Download the BTS - Overview
Before a BTS can operate, each equipped device must contain device
initialization (ROM) code. ROM code is loaded in all devices during
manufacture or factory repair. Device application (RAM) code and data
must be downloaded to each equipped device by the user before the BTS
can be made fully functional for the site where it is installed.
ROM Code
Downloading ROM code to BTS devices from the LMF is NOT routine
maintenance nor a normal part of the optimization process. It is only
done in unusual situations where the resident ROM code in the device
does not match the release level of the site operating software AND the
CBSC cannot communicate with the BTS to perform the download. If
you must download ROM code, refer to Appendix H.
Before ROM code can be downloaded from the LMF, the correct ROM
code file for each device to be loaded must exist on the LMF computer.
NOTE
The ROM code file is not available for GLI3s. GLI3s are ROM
code loaded at the factory.
RAM Code
Before RAM code can be downloaded from the CDMA LMF, the correct
RAM code file for each device must exist on the LMF computer. RAM
code can be automatically or manually selected depending on the Device
menu item chosen and where the RAM code file for the device is stored
in the CDMA LMF file structure. The RAM code file is selected
automatically if the file is in the \lmf\cdma\loads\n.n.n.n\code folder
(where n.n.n.n is the version number of the download code). The RAM
code file in the code folder must have the correct hardware bin number.
RAM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the
download is started, the device being downloaded changes to OOS-ROM
(blue). When the download is completed successfully, the device
changes to OOS-RAM (yellow). When code is downloaded to an MGLI,
the LMF automatically also downloads data, and then enables the MGLI.
When enabled, the MGLI changes to INS (green).
For non-MGLI devices, data must be downloaded after RAM code is
downloaded. To download data, the device state must be OOS-RAM
(yellow).
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-25
Download the BTS
68P09255A61-4
Download Code to Devices
Code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the
download starts, the device being downloaded changes to
OOS_ROM (blue). If the download is completed successfully, the device
changes to OOS_RAM with code loaded (yellow). Prior to downloading
a device, a code file must exist. The code file is selected automatically if
the code file is in the /lmf/cdma/n.n.n.n/code folder (where n.n.n.n is the
version number of the download code that matches the “NextLoad”
parameter in the CDF file). The code file in the code folder must have
the correct hardware bin number. Code can be automatically or manually
selected.
The following are the devices to be downloaded:
 Span Configuration
- Master Group Line Interface (MGLI2 or MGLI3)
- Group Line Interface (GLI2 or GLI3)
NOTE
Clock Synchronization Module (CSM)
Multi Channel Card (MCC24E, MCC8E or MCC-1X)
Broadband Transceiver (BBX2 or BBX-1X)
Test Subscriber Interface Card (TSIC) - if RFDS is installed
The MGLI must be successfully downloaded with code and data,
and put INS before downloading any other device. The
download code process for an MGLI automatically downloads
data and enables the MGLI before downloading other devices.
The other devices can be downloaded in any order.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-12 to download the firmware
application code for the MGLI. The download code action downloads
data and also enables the MGLI.
Prerequisite
Prior to performing this procedure, ensure a code file exists for each of
the devices to be downloaded.
Table 3-12: Download and Enable MGLI
 Step
3-26
Action
Select Tools>Update Next Load>CDMA function to ensure the Next Load parameter is set to the
correct code version level.
Download code to the primary MGLI by clicking on the MGLI.
- From the Device pull down menu, select Download>Code/Data.
A status report confirms change in the device(s) status.
- Click OK to close the status window. (The MGLI should automatically be downloaded with
data and enabled.)
Download code and data to the redundant MGLI but do not enable at this time.
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Download the BTS
68P09255A61-4
Download Code and Data to Non-GLI Devices
Non-GLI devices can be downloaded individually or all equipped
devices can be downloaded with one action. Follow the procedure in
Table 3-13 to download code and data to the non-GLI devices.
NOTE
- When downloading multiple devices, the download may
fail for some of the devices (a time out occurs). These
devices can be downloaded separately after completing the
multiple download.
- CSM devices are RAM code-loaded at the factory. RAM
code is downloaded to CSMs only if updating to a newer
software version.
Table 3-13: Download Code and Data to Non-GLI Devices
 Step
Action
Select all devices to be downloaded.
From the Device pull down menu, select Download>Code/Data.
A status report displays the result of the download for each selected device.
Click OK to close the status window.
NOTE
After the download has started, the device being downloaded changes to blue. If the download is
completed successfully, the device changes to yellow (OOS-RAM with code loaded).
After a BBX, CSM or MCC is successfully downloaded with code and has changed to
OOS-RAM, the status LED should be rapidly flashing GREEN.
NOTE
The command in Step 2 loads both code and data. Data can be downloaded without doing a code
download anytime a device is OOS-RAM using the command in Step 3.
Aug 2002
To download the firmware application data to each device, select the target device and select:
Device>Download>Data
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-27
Download the BTS
68P09255A61-4
Select CSM Clock Source
A CSM can have three different clock sources. The Clock Source
function can be used to select the clock source for each of the three
inputs. This function is only used if the clock source for a CSM needs to
be changed. The Clock Source function provides the following clock
source options:
Local GPS
Mate GPS
Remote GPS
HSO (only for sources 2 & 3)
HSO Extender
HSOX (only for sources 2 & 3)
LFR (only for sources 2 & 3)
10 MHz (only for sources 2 & 3)
NONE (only for sources 2 & 3)
Prerequisites
MGLI=INS_ACT
CSM= OOS_RAM or INS_ACT
Follow the procedure in Table 3-14 to select a CSM Clock Source.
Table 3-14: Select CSM Clock Source
Step
Action
Select the applicable CSM(s).
Click on the Device menu.
Click on the CSM/MAWI menu item.
Click on the Select Clock Source menu item.
A clock source selection window is displayed.
Select the applicable clock source in the Clock Reference Source pick lists.
Uncheck the related check box if you do not want the displayed pick list item to be used.
Click on the OK button.
A status report window displays the results of the selection action.
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
Enable CSMs
Each BTS CSM system features two CSM boards per site. In a typical
operation, the primary CSM locks its Digital Phase Locked Loop
(DPLL) circuits to GPS signals. These signals are generated by either an
on-board GPS module (RF-GPS) or a remote GPS receiver (R-GPS).
The CSM2 card is required when using the R-GPS. The GPS receiver
(mounted on CSM-1) is the primary timing reference and synchronizes
the entire cellular system. CSM-2 provides redundancy but does not
have a GPS receiver.
3-28
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Download the BTS
68P09255A61-4
The BTS may be equipped with a remote GPS, LORAN-C LFR, HSO
10 MHz Rubidium source, or HSOX for expansion frames, which the
CSM can use as a secondary timing reference. In all cases, the CSM
monitors and determines what reference to use at a given time.
NOTE
- CSMs are code loaded at the factory. This data is retained
in EEPROM. The download code procedure is required in
the event it becomes necessary to code load CSMs with
updated software versions. Use the status function to
determine the current code load versions.
- For non-RGPS sites only, verify the CSM configured with
the GPS receiver “daughter board” is installed in the
CSM-1 slot before continuing.
- The CSM(s) to be enabled must have been downloaded
with code (Yellow, OOS-RAM) and data.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-15 to enable the CSMs.
Table 3-15: Enable CSMs
 Step
Action
Verify the CSM(s) have been downloaded with code (Yellow, OOS-RAM) and data.
Click on the target CSM.
From the Device pull down, select Enable.
NOTE
If equipped with two CSMs, enable CSM-2 first and then CSM-1.
A status report confirms change in the device(s) status.
Click OK to close the status window.
NOTE
FAIL may be shown in the status table for enable action. If Waiting For Phase Lock is shown in
the Description field, the CSM changes to the enabled state after phase lock is achieved. CSM-1
houses the GPS receiver. The enable sequence can take up to one hour to complete.
NOTE
The GPS satellite system satellites are not in a geosynchronous orbit and are maintained and
operated by the United States Department of Defense (D.O.D.). The D.O.D. periodically alters
satellite orbits; therefore, satellite trajectories are subject to change. A GPS receiver that is INS
contains an “almanac” that is updated periodically to take these changes into account.
If an installed GPS receiver has not been updated for a number of weeks, it may take up to one
hour for the GPS receiver “almanac” to be updated.
Once updated, the GPS receiver must track at least four satellites and obtain (hold) a 3-D position
fix for a minimum of 45 seconds before the CSM will come in-service. (In some cases, the GPS
receiver needs to track only one satellite, depending on accuracy mode set during the data load.)
NOTE
If equipped with two CSMs, the LMF should display CSM-1 as bright GREEN (INS-ACT) and
CSM-2 as dark green (INS-STB). After the CSMs have been successfully enabled, the
PWR/ALM LEDs are steady green (alternating green/red indicates the card is in an alarm state).
Aug 2002
If more than an hour has passed, refer to Table 3-19 and Table 3-20 to determine the cause.
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-29
Download the BTS
68P09255A61-4
Enable MCCs
This procedure configures the MCC and sets the “TX fine adjust”
parameter. The “TX fine adjust” parameter is not a transmit gain setting,
but a timing adjustment that compensates for the processing delay in the
BTS (approximately 3 ms).
Follow the procedure in Table 3-16 to enable the MCCs.
NOTE
The MGLI and primary CSM must be downloaded and enabled
(IN-SERVICE ACTIVE) before downloading and enabling the
MCC.
Table 3-16: Enable MCCs
 Step
Action
Verify the MCC(s) have been downloaded with code (Yellow, OOS-RAM) and data.
Select the MCCs to be enabled or from the Select pull-down menu choose MCCs.
From the Device menu, select Enable
A status report confirms change in the device(s) status.
Click on OK to close the status report window.
Enable Redundant GLIs
Follow the procedure in Table 3-17 to enable the redundant GLI(s).
Table 3-17: Enable Redundant GLIs
 Step
3-30
Action
Select the target redundant GLI(s).
From the Device menu, select Enable.
A status report window confirms the change in the device(s) status and the enabled GLI(s) is
green.
Click on OK to close the status report window.
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification
68P09255A61-4
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification
CSM & LFR Background
The primary function of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM)
boards (slots 1 and 2) is to maintain CDMA system time. The CSM in
slot 1 is the primary timing source while slot 2 provides redundancy. The
CSM2 card (CSM second generation) is required when using the remote
GPS receiver (R-GPS). R-GPS uses a GPS receiver in the antenna head
that has a digital output to the CSM2 card. CSM2 can have a daughter
card as a local GPS receiver to support an RF-GPS signal.
The CSM2 switches between the primary and redundant units (slots 1
and 2) upon failure or command. CDMA Clock Distribution
Cards (CCDs) buffer and distribute even-second reference and 19.6608
MHz clocks. CCD-1 is married to CSM-1 and CCD-2 is married to
CSM 2. A failure on CSM-1 or CCD-1 cause the system to switch to
redundant CSM-2 and CCD-2.
In a typical operation, the primary CSM locks its Digital Phase Locked
Loop (DPLL) circuits to GPS signals. These signals are generated by
either an on-board GPS module (RF-GPS) or a remote GPS receiver
(R-GPS). The CSM2 card is required when using the R-GPS. DPLL
circuits employed by the CSM provide switching between the primary
and redundant unit upon request. Synchronization between the primary
and redundant CSM cards, as well as the LFR or HSO back-up source,
provides excellent reliability and performance.
Each CSM board features an ovenized, crystal oscillator that provides
19.6608 MHz clock, even second tick reference, and 3 MHz sinewave
reference, referenced to the selected synchronization source (GPS,
LORAN-C Frequency Receiver (LFR), or High Stability Oscillator
(HSO), T1 Span, or external reference oscillator sources). The 3 MHz
signals are also routed to the RDM EXP 1A & 1B connectors on the top
interconnect panel for distribution to co-located frames at the site.
Fault management has the capability of switching between the GPS
synchronization source and the LFR/HSO backup source in the event of
a GPS receiver failure on CSM-1. During normal operation, the CSM-1
board selects GPS as the primary source (see Table 3-19). The source
selection can also be overridden via the LMF or by the system software.
All boards are mounted in the C-CCP shelf at the top of the BTS frame.
Figure 1-10 on page 1-28 illustrates the location of the boards in the
BTS frame.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-31
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification
68P09255A61-4
Low Frequency Receiver/
High Stability Oscillator
The CSM handles the overall configuration and status monitoring
functions of the LFR/HSO. In the event of GPS failure, the LFR/HSO is
capable of maintaining synchronization initially established by the GPS
reference signal.
The LFR requires an active external antenna to receive LORAN RF
signals. Timing pulses are derived from this signal, which is
synchronized to Universal Time Coordinates (UTC) and GPS time. The
LFR can maintain system time indefinitely after initial GPS lock.
The HSO is a high stability 10 MHz oscillator with the necessary
interface to the CSMs. The HSO is typically installed in those
geographical areas not covered by the LORAN-C system. Since the
HSO is a free-standing oscillator, system time can only be maintained
for 24 hours after 24 hours of GPS lock.
Upgrades and Expansions: LFR2/HSO2/HSOX
LFR2/HSO2 (second generation cards) both export a timing signal to the
expansion or logical BTS frames. The associated expansion or logical
frames require an HSO-expansion (HSOX) whether the starter frame has
an LFR2 or an HSO2. The HSOX accepts input from the starter frame
and interfaces with the CSM cards in the expansion frame. LFR and
LFR2 use the same source code in source selection (see Table 3-18).
HSO, HSO2, and HSOX use the same source code in source selection
(see Table 3-18).
NOTE
Allow the base site and test equipment to warm up for 60
minutes after any interruption in oscillator power. CSM board
warm-up allows the oscillator oven temperature and oscillator
frequency to stabilize prior to test. Test equipment warm-up
allows the Rubidium standard timebase to stabilize in frequency
before any measurements are made.
Front Panel LEDs
The status of the LEDs on the CSM boards are as follows:
 Steady Green - Master CSM locked to GPS or LFR (INS).
 Rapidly Flashing Green - Standby CSM locked to GPS or LFR
(STBY).
 Flashing Green/Rapidly Flashing Red - CSM OOS-RAM attempting
to lock on GPS signal.
 Rapidly Flashing Green and Red - Alarm condition exists. Trouble
Notifications (TNs) are currently being reported to the GLI.
3-32
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification
68P09255A61-4
CSM Frequency Verification
The objective of this procedure is the initial verification of the CSM
boards before performing the RF path verification tests. Parts of this
procedure will be repeated for final verification after the overall
optimization has been completed.
Null Modem Cable
A null modem cable is required. It is connected between the MMI port
of the primary CSM and the null modem board. Figure 3-8 shows the
wiring detail for the null modem cable.
Figure 3-8: Null Modem Cable Detail
9-PIN D-FEMALE
GND
RX
TX
RTS
CTS
RSD/DCD
DTR
DSR
9-PIN D-FEMALE
ON BOTH CONNECTORS
SHORT PINS 7, 8;
SHORT PINS 1, 4, & 6
GND
TX
RX
RTS
CTS
RSD/DCD
DTR
DSR
FW00362
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
 The LMF is NOT logged into the BTS.
 The COM1 port is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM via
a null modem board.
Test Equipment Setup: GPS & LFR/HSO Verification
Follow the procedure in Table 3-18 to set up test equipment while
referring to Figure 3-9 as required.
Table 3-18: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)
Step
Action
Perform one of the following operations:
 For local GPS (RF-GPS), verify a CSM board with a GPS receiver is installed in primary CSM
slot 1 and that CSM-1 is INS.
This is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN1145 on the board in slot 1.
 For Remote GPS (RGPS), verify a CSM2 board is installed in primary slot 1 and that CSM-1 is
INS.
This is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN4132ED (or later).
Remove CSM-2 (if installed) and connect a serial cable from the LMF COM 1 port (via null modem
board) to the MMI port on CSM-1.
Reinstall CSM-2.
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-33
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-18: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)
Step
Action
Start an MMI communication session with CSM-1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see
Table 3-5)
NOTE
The LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is being
used for the MMI session.
When the terminal screen appears, press the  key until the CSM> prompt appears.
Figure 3-9: CSM MMI terminal connection
REFERENCE
OSCILLATOR
CSM board shown
removed from frame
MMI SERIAL
PORT
EVEN SECOND
TICK TEST POINT
REFERENCE
GPS RECEIVER
ANTENNA INPUT
ANTENNA COAX
CABLE
GPS RECEIVER
19.6 MHZ TEST
POINT REFERENCE
(NOTE 1)
NULL MODEM
BOARD
(TRN9666A)
9-PIN TO 9-PIN
RS-232 CABLE
FW00372
LMF
NOTEBOOK
DB9-TO-DB25
ADAPTER
COM1
NOTES:
1. One LED on each CSM:
Green = IN-SERVICE ACTIVE
Fast Flashing Green = OOS-RAM
Red = Fault Condition
Flashing Green & Red = Fault
3-34
RS-232 SERIAL
MODEM CABLE
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification
68P09255A61-4
GPS Initialization/Verification
Follow the procedure in Table 3-19 to initialize and verify proper GPS
receiver operation.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
 The LMF is not logged into the BTS.
 The COM1 port is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM via
a null modem board (see Figure 3-9).
 The primary CSM and HSO (if equipped) have been warmed up for at
least 15 minutes.
CAUTION
Aug 2002
Connect the GPS antenna to the GPS RF connector ONLY.
Damage to the GPS antenna and/or receiver can result if the
GPS antenna is inadvertently connected to any other RF
connector.
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-35
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
To verify that Clock alarms (0000), Dpll is locked and has a reference source, and
GPS self test passed messages are displayed within the report, issue the following MMI
command
bstatus
- Observe the following typical response:
Clock Alarms (0000):
DPLL is locked and has a reference source.
GPS receiver self test result: passed
Time since reset 0:33:11, time since power on: 0:33:11
Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to display the current status of the Loran and the
GPS receivers.
sources
- Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with LFR:
N Source Name Type
TO Good Status
Last Phase Target Phase Valid
------------------------------------------------------------------------0 LocalGPS
Primary 4
YES
Good
Yes
1 LFR CHA
Secondary 4
YES
Good
-2013177
-2013177
Yes
2 Not Used
Current reference source number: 0
- Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with HSO:
Num Source Name Type
TO Good
Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
---------------------------------------------------------------------------0
Local GPS
Primary 4
Yes
Good
Yes
HSO
Backup
No
N/A
timed-out*
Timed-out* No
*NOTE “Timed-out” should only be displayed while the HSO is warming up. “Not-Present” or
“Faulty” should not be displayed. If the HSO does not appear as one of the sources, then configure the
HSO as a back-up source by entering the following command at the CSM> prompt:
ss 1 12
After a maximum of 15 minutes, the Rubidium oscillator should reach operational temperature and the
LED on the HSO should now have changed from red to green. After the HSO front panel LED has
changed to green, enter sources  at the CSM> prompt. Verify that the HSO is now a valid
source by confirming that the bold text below matches the response of the “sources” command.
The HSO should be valid within one (1) minute, assuming the DPLL is locked and the HSO rubidium
oscillator is fully warmed.
Num Source Name Type
TO Good
Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
---------------------------------------------------------------------------0
Local GPS
Primary 4
Yes
Good
Yes
HSO
Backup
Yes
N/A
xxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxx Yes
3-36
HSO information (underlined text above, verified from left to right) is usually the #1 reference source.
If this is not the case, have the OMCR determine the correct BTS timing source has been identified in
the database by entering the display bts csmgen command and correct as required using the edit
csm csmgen refsrc command.
. . . continued on next page
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
68P09255A61-4
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification
Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:
- If LED is RED, verify that HSO had been powered up for at least 5 minutes. After oscillator
temperature is stable, LED should go GREEN Wait for this to occur before continuing !
- If “timed out” is displayed in the Last Phase column, suspect the HSO output buffer or oscillator
is defective
- Verify the HSO is FULLY SEATED and LOCKED to prevent any possible board warpage
Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above):
- GPS information is usually the 0 reference source.
- At least one Primary source must indicate “Status = good” and “Valid = yes” to bring site up.
Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to verify that the GPS receiver is in tracking mode.
gstatus
- Observe the following typical response:
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
(GPS)
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
GPS Receiver Control Task State: tracking satellites.
Time since last valid fix: 0 seconds.
Recent Change Data:
Antenna cable delay 0 ns.
Initial position: lat 117650000 msec, lon -350258000 msec, height 0 cm (GPS)
Initial position accuracy (0): estimated.
GPS Receiver Status:
Position hold: lat 118245548 msec, lon -350249750 msec, height 20270 cm
Current position: lat 118245548 msec, lon -350249750 msec, height 20270 cm
8 satellites tracked, receiving 8 satellites,
Current Dilution of Precision (PDOP or HDOP):
Date & Time: 1998:01:13:21:36:11
GPS Receiver Status Byte: 0x08
Chan:0, SVID: 16, Mode: 8, RSSI: 148, Status:
Chan:1, SVID: 29, Mode: 8, RSSI: 132, Status:
Chan:2, SVID: 18, Mode: 8, RSSI: 121, Status:
Chan:3, SVID: 14, Mode: 8, RSSI: 110, Status:
Chan:4, SVID: 25, Mode: 8, RSSI: 83, Status:
Chan:5, SVID: 3, Mode: 8, RSSI: 49, Status:
Chan:6, SVID: 19, Mode: 8, RSSI: 115, Status:
Chan:7, SVID: 22, Mode: 8, RSSI: 122, Status:
8 satellites visible.
0.
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
GPS Receiver Identification:
COPYRIGHT 1991-1996 MOTOROLA INC.
SFTW P/N # 98-P36830P
SOFTWARE VER # 8
SOFTWARE REV # 8
SOFTWARE DATE 6 AUG 1996
MODEL #
B3121P1115
HDWR P/N # _
SERIAL #
SSG0217769
MANUFACTUR DATE 6B07
OPTIONS LIST
IB
The receiver has 8 channels and is equipped with TRAIM.
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-37
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
Verify the following GPS information (shown above in underlined text):
- At least 4 satellites are tracked, and 4 satellites are visible.
- GPS Receiver Control Task State is “tracking satellites”. Do not continue until this occurs!
- Dilution of Precision indication is not more that 30.
Record the current position base site latitude, longitude, height and height reference (height reference
to Mean Sea Level (MSL) or GPS height (GPS). (GPS = 0 MSL = 1).
If steps 1 through 7 pass, the GPS is good.
NOTE
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify that:
- If Initial position accuracy is “estimated” (typical), at least 4 satellites must be tracked and
visible (1 satellite must be tracked and visible if actual lat, log, and height data for this site has
been entered into CDF file).
- If Initial position accuracy is “surveyed”, position data currently in the CDF file is assumed to be
accurate. GPS will not automatically survey and update its position.
- The GPS antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.
- GPS antenna connector center conductor measures approximately +5 Vdc with respect to the
shield.
- There is no more than 4.5 dB of loss between the GPS antenna OSX connector and the BTS frame
GPS input.
- Any lightning protection installed between GPS antenna and BTS frame is installed correctly.
Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to verify that the CSM is warmed up and that GPS
acquisition has taken place.
debug dpllp
Observe the following typical response if the CSM is not warmed up (15 minutes from application of
power) (If warmed-up proceed to step 10)
CSM>DPLL Task Wait. 884 seconds left.
DPLL Task Wait. 882 seconds left.
DPLL Task Wait. 880 seconds left.
...........etc.
NOTE
The warm command can be issued at the MMI port used to force the CSM into warm-up, but the
reference oscillator will be unstable.
. . . continued on next page
3-38
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
10
Action
Observe the following typical response if the CSM is warmed up.
c:17486
c:17486
c:17470
c:17486
c:17470
c:17470
off:
off:
off:
off:
off:
off:
-11,
-11,
-11,
-11,
-11,
-11,
3,
3,
1,
3,
1,
1,
TK
TK
TK
TK
TK
TK
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
S0:
S0:
S0:
S0:
S0:
S0:
S1:-2013175,-2013175
S1:-2013175,-2013175
S1:-2013175,-2013175
S1:-2013175,-2013175
S1:-2013175,-2013175
S1:-2013175,-2013175
11
Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above, from left to right):
- Lower limit offset from tracked source variable is not less than -60 (equates to 3µs limit).
- Upper limit offset from tracked source variable is not more than +60 (equates to 3µs limit).
- TK SRC: 0 is selected, where SRC 0 = GPS.
12
Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to exit the debug mode display.
debug dpllp
LFR Initialization/Verification
The LORAN-C LFR is a full size card that resides in the C-CCP Shelf.
The LFR is a completely self-contained unit that interfaces with the
CSM via a serial communications link. The CSM handles the overall
configuration and status monitoring functions of the LFR.
The LFR receives a 100 kHz, 35 kHz BW signal from up to 40 stations
(8 chains) simultaneously and provides the following major functions:
 Automatic antenna pre-amplifier calibration (using a second
differential pair between LFR and LFR antenna)
 A 1 second ±200 ηs strobe to the CSM
If the BTS is equipped with an LFR, follow the procedure in Table 3-20
to initialize the LFR and verify proper operation as a backup source for
the GPS.
NOTE
Aug 2002
If CSMRefSrc2 = 2 in the CDF file, the BTS is equipped with
an LFR. If CSMRefSrc2 = 18, the BTS is equipped with an
HSO.
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-39
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-20: LFR Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
At the CSM> prompt, enter lstatus  to verify that the LFR is in tracking
mode. A typical response is:
CSM> lstatus 
LFR Station
St ti
St
Status:
Clock coherence: 512
5930M 51/60 dB 0 S/N
5930X 52/64 dn -1 S/N
5990
47/55 dB -6 S/N
7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N
7980W 65/69 dB 14 S/N
7980X 48/54 dB -4 S/N
7980Y 46/58 dB -8 S/N
7980Z 60/67 dB 8 S/N
8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N
8290W 73/79 dB 20 S/N
8290W 58/61 dB 6 S/N
8970M 89/95 dB 29 S/N
8970W 62/66 dB 10 S/N
8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N
8970Y 73/79 dB 19 S/N
8970Z 62/65 dB 10 S/N
9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N
9610V 58/61 dB 8 S/N
9610W 47/49 dB -4 S/N
9610X 46/57 dB -5 S/N
9610Y 48/54 dB -5 S/N
9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N
9940M 50/53 dB -1 S/N
9940W 49/56 dB -4
4 S/N
9940Y 46/50 dB-10 S/N
9960M 73/79 dB 22 S/N
9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N
9960X 51/63 dB -1 S/N
9960Y 59/67 dB 8 S/N
9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N
Note
> This must be greater
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Fl
Flag:
Flag: . PLL Station .
Flag:
Flag:E
Flag:
Flag
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Fl
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:E
Flag:E
Flag:E
Flag
Flag:
Flag:S
Flag:E
Flag:E
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Fl
Flag:
LFR Task State: lfr locked to station 7980W
LFR Recent Change Data:
Search List: 5930 5990 7980 8290 8970 9940 9610 9960
PLL GRI: 7980W
LFR Master, reset not needed, not the reference source.
CSM>
than 100 before LFR
becomes a valid source.
> This shows the LFR is
locked to the selected
PLL station.
This search list and PLL
data must match the
configuration for the
geographical location
of the cell site.
Verify the following LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type):
- Locate the “dot” that indicates the current phase locked station assignment (assigned by MM).
- Verify that the station call letters are as specified in site documentation as well as M X Y Z
assignment.
- Verify the signal to noise (S/N) ratio of the phase locked station is greater than 8.
At the CSM> prompt, enter sources  to display the current status of the the LORAN receiver.
- Observe the following typical response.
Num Source Name Type
TO Good
Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
---------------------------------------------------------------------------0
Local GPS
Primary 4
Yes
Good
-3
Yes
LFR ch A
Secondary 4
Yes
Good
-2013177
-2013177
Yes
Not used
Current reference source number: 1
. . . continued on next page
3-40
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-20: LFR Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
Note
LORAN-C LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type) is usually the #1 reference source
(verified from left to right).
NOTE
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:
- The LFR antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.
- The antenna pre-amplifier power and calibration twisted pair connections are intact and < 91.4 m
(300 ft) in length.
- A dependable connection to suitable Earth Ground is in place.
- The search list and PLL station for cellsite location are correctly configured .
NOTE
LFR functionality should be verified using the “source” command (as shown in Step 3). Use the
underlined responses on the LFR row to validate correct LFR operation.
Close the Hyperterminal window.
HSO Initialization/Verification
The HSO module is a full-size card that resides in the C-CCP Shelf.
This completely self contained high stability 10 MHz oscillator
interfaces with the CSM via a serial communications link. The CSM
handles the overall configuration and status monitoring functions of the
HSO. In the event of GPS failure, the HSO is capable of maintaining
synchronization initially established by the GPS reference signal for a
limited time.
The HSO is typically installed in those geographical areas not covered
by the LORAN-C system and provides the following major functions:
 Reference oscillator temperature and phase lock monitor circuitry
 Generates a highly stable 10 MHz sine wave.
 Reference divider circuitry converts 10 MHz sine wave to 10 MHz
TTL signal, which is divided to provide a 1 PPS strobe to the CSM.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-41
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification
68P09255A61-4
Prerequisites
 The LMF is not logged into the BTS.
 The COM1 port is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM via
a null modem board.
 The primary CSM and the HSO (if equipped) have warmed up for 15
minutes.
If the BTS is equipped with an HSO, follow the procedure in Table 3-21
to configure the HSO.
Table 3-21: HSO Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
At the BTS, slide the HSO card into the cage.
NOTE
The LED on the HSO should light red for no longer than 15-minutes, then switch to green. The CSM
must be locked to GPS.
On the LMF at the CSM> prompt, enter sources .
- Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with HSO:
Num Source Name Type
TO Good
Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
---------------------------------------------------------------------------0
Local GPS
Primary 4
Yes
Good
Yes
HSO
Backup
Yes
N/A
xxxxxxx
-69532
Yes
Not used
Current reference source number: 0
When the CSM is locked to GPS, verify that the HSO “Good” field is Yes and the “Valid” field is Yes.
If source “1” is not configured as HSO, enter at the CSM> prompt: ss 1 12 
Check for Good in the Status field.
At the CSM> prompt, enter sources .
Verify the HSO valid field is Yes. If not, repeat this step until the “Valid” status of Yes is returned. The
HSO should be valid within one (1) minute, assuming the DPLL is locked and the HSO Rubidium
oscillator is fully warmed.
3-42
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Test Equipment Set-up
68P09255A61-4
Test Equipment Set-up
Connecting Test Equipment to the BTS
All test equipment is controlled by the LMF via an IEEE-488/GPIB bus.
If there is a communications problem between the LMF and any piece of
test equipment, verify that the GPIB addresses have been set correctly
(normally 1 for a signal generator, 13 for a power meter, and 18 for a
CDMA analyzer). See Appendix J for procedures to verify and change
the GPIB addresses.
The following equipment is required to perform optimization:
LMF
Test set
Directional coupler and attenuator
RF cables and connectors
 Null modem cable (see Figure 3-8)
 GPIB interface box
Refer to Table 3-22 and Table 3-23 for an overview of connections for
test equipment currently supported by the LMF. In addition, see the
following figures:
 Figure 3-12 and Figure 3-13 show the test set connections for TX
calibration.
 Figure 3-14 and Figure 3-15 show test set connections for IS-95 A/B
optimization/ATP tests.
 Figure 3-16 shows test set connections for IS-95 A/B and
CDMA 2000 optimization/ATP tests.
 Figure 3-17 and Figure 3-18 show typical TX and RX ATP setup with
a directional coupler (shown with and without RFDS).
Supported Test Sets
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the test equipment, all TX test connections
must be through the directional coupler and in-line attenuator as
shown in the test setup illustrations.
IS-95 A/B Testing
Optimization and ATP testing for IS-95A/B may be performed using
one of the following test sets:
 CyberTest
 Advantest R3465 and HP 437B or Gigatronics Power Meter
 Hewlett-Packard HP 8935
 Hewlett-Packard HP 8921 (W/CDMA and PCS Interface for
1.7/1.9 GHz) and HP 437B or Gigatronics Power Meter
The equipment listed above cannot be used for CDMA 2000 testing.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-43
Test Equipment Set-up
68P09255A61-4
CDMA 2000 Testing
NOTE
IS-95 C is the same as CDMA 2000.
Optimization and ATP testing may be performed using one of the
following test sets:
 Advantest R3267 Analyzer with Advantest R3562 Signal Generator
 Agilent E4406A with E4432B Signal Generator
 Hewlett-Packard HP 8935 with option 200 or R2K for 1X TX and
with Agilent E4432B Signal Generator for 1X FER
The E4406A/E4432B pair, or the R3267/R3562 pair, should be
connected together using a GPIB cable. In addition, the R3562 and
R3267 should be connected with a serial cable from the Serial I/O to the
Serial I/O. This test equipment is capable of performing tests in both
IS-95 A/B mode and CDMA 2000 mode if the required options are
installed.
Optional test equipment
 Spectrum Analyzer (HP8594E) - can be used to perform cable
calibration.
3-44
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Test Equipment Set-up
68P09255A61-4
Test Equipment Reference Chart
Table 3-22 and Table 3-23 depicts the current test equipment available
meeting Motorola standards.
To identify the connection ports, locate the test equipment presently
being used in the TEST SETS columns, and read down the column.
Where a ball appears in the column, connect one end of the test cable to
that port. Follow the horizontal line to locate the end connection(s),
reading up the column to identify the appropriate equipment/BTS port.
Table 3-22: IS-95 A/B Test Equipment Setup
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER
ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENT
SIGNAL
CyberTest
EVEN SECOND
SYNCHRONIZATION
EVEN
SEC REF
EVEN SEC
SYNC IN
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
SYNC
MONITOR
TIME
BASE IN
CDMA
TIME BASE
IN
EXT
REF IN
CDMA
TIME
BASE IN
CDMA
TIME
BASE IN
FREQ
MONITOR
IEEE
488
GPIB
HP-IB
HP-IB
HP-IB
RF
IN/OUT
INPUT
50-OHM
RF
IN/OUT
RF
IN/OUT
RF
IN/OUT
RF OUT
50-OHM
RF
IN/OUT
DUPLEX
OUT
RF OUT
ONLY
19.6608 MHZ
CLOCK
CONTROL
IEEE 488 BUS
TX TEST
CABLES
RX TEST
CABLES
Aug 2002
RF GEN
OUT
HP
8935
HP
8921A
HP 8921
W/PCS
Power
Meter
HP-IB
GPIB
Interface
GPIB
LMF
BTS
SERIAL
PORT
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
30 dB Directional Coupler & 20
dB Pad*
Advantest
R3465
30 DB COUPLER
AND 20 DB PAD
TX1-6
RX1-6
3-45
Test Equipment Set-up
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-23: IS-95 A/B/C Test Equipment Setup
TEST SETS
SIGNAL
Advantest
R3562
Signal
Generator
EVEN SECOND
SYNCHRONIZATION
EXT
TRIG IN
19.6608 MHZ
CLOCK
SIGNAL SOURCE
CONTROLLED
SERIAL I/O
10 MHZ
CONTROL
IEEE 488 BUS
TX TEST
CABLES
RX TEST
CABLES
3-46
Advantest
R3267
Analyzer
EXT TRIG
MOD TIME
BASE IN
SERIAL I/O
ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENT
Agilent
E4406A
Analyzer
Agilent
E4432B
Signal
Generator
TRIGGER
IN
PATTERN
TRIG IN
EXT
REF IN
HP
8935
BTS
SYNC
MONITOR
EXT
REF IN
FREQ
MONITOR
SERIAL I/O
10 MHZ OUT
10 MHZ OUT
IEEE
488
GPIB
HP-IB
GPIB
HP-IB
RF IN
RF INPUT
50 OHM
RF OUTPUT
50 OHM
RF
IN/OUT
RF OUT
50-OHM
RF OUT
ONLY
RF OUTPUT
50-OHM
DUPLEX
RF GEN
OUT
LMF
30 dB
Directional
Coupler &
20 dB Pad*
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
10 MHZ IN
RF OUT
Power
Meter
GPIB
Interface
10 MHZ IN
HP-IB
GPIB
SERIAL
PORT
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
30 DB COUPLER
AND 20 DB PAD
TX1-6
RX1-6
Aug 2002
Test Equipment Set-up
68P09255A61-4
Equipment Warm-up
NOTE
Warm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes prior to
performing the BTS optimization procedure. This assures BTS
site stability and contributes to optimization accuracy. (Time
spent running initial power-up, hardware/firmware audit, and
BTS download counts as warm-up time.)
Calibrating Cables
Figure 3-10 and Figure 3-11 show the cable calibration setup for various
supported test sets. The left side of the diagram depicts the location of
the input and output ports of each test set, and the right side details the
set up for each test.
WARNING
Aug 2002
Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTS TX
OUT connector, verify there are NO CDMA BBX channels
keyed. At active sites, have the OMC-R/CBSC place the antenna
(sector) assigned to the LPA under test OOS. Failure to do so can
result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-47
Test Equipment Set-up
68P09255A61-4
Figure 3-10: Cable Calibration Test Setup
SUPPORTED TEST SETS
CALIBRATION SET UP
Motorola CyberTest
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÌ
ANT IN
A. SHORT CABLE CAL
SHORT
CABLE
TEST
SET
RF GEN OUT
Note: The Directional Coupler is not used with the
Cybertest Test Set. The TX cable is connected
directly to the Cybertest Test Set.
B. RX TEST SETUP
A 10dB attenuator must be used with the short test
cable for cable calibration with the CyberTest Test
Set. The 10dB attenuator is used only for the cable
calibration procedure, not with the test cables for
TX calibration and ATP tests.
N-N FEMALE
ADAPTER
RX
CABLE
Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8935
ÁÁ
Á
ÁÁ
Á
ANT
IN
SHORT
CABLE
TEST
SET
DUPLEX
OUT
Advantest Model R3465
RF OUTPUT
50-OHM
C. TX TEST SETUP
DIRECTIONAL COUPLER
(30 DB)
RF INPUT
50-OHM
20 DB PAD
FOR 1.9 GHZ
100-W ATT (MIN)
NON-RADIA TING
RF LOAD
TX
CABLE
Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8921A
SHORT
CABLE
N-N FEMALE
ADAPTER
TX
CABLE
RF IN/OUT
TEST
SET
DUPLEX
OUT
Note: For 800 MHZ only. The HP8921A cannot
be used to calibrate cables for PCS frequencies.
FW00089
3-48
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Test Equipment Set-up
68P09255A61-4
Figure 3-11: Cable Calibration Test Setup (Advantest R3267, Agilent E4406A)
SUPPORTED TEST SETS
CALIBRATION SET UP
A. SHORT CABLE CAL
Advantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)
SHORT
CABLE
TEST
SET
RF IN
EXT TRIG IN
B. RX TEST SETUP
MOD TIME BASE IN
(EXT REF IN)
RF OUT
N-N FEMALE
ADAPTER
RX
CABLE
Agilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)
SHORT
CABLE
TEST
SET
RF
OUTPUT
50 OHM
RF
INPUT 50
OHM
C. TX TEST SETUP
DIRECTIONAL COUPLER
(30 DB)
Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8935
ÁÁ
Á
ÁÁ
Á
ANT
IN
20 DB PAD
FOR 1.9 GHZ
100-W ATT (MIN)
NON-RADIA TING
RF LOAD
TX
CABLE
DUPLEX
OUT
SHORT
CABLE
N-N FEMALE
ADAPTER
TX
CABLE
TEST
SET
REF FW00089
Setup for TX Calibration
Figure 3-12 and Figure 3-13 show the test set connections for TX
calibration.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-49
Test Equipment Set-up
68P09255A61-4
Figure 3-12: TX Calibration Test Setup (CyberTest, HP 8935, and Advantest)
TEST SETS
TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP
Motorola CyberTest
POWER
SENSOR
100-W ATT (MIN)
NON-RADIA TING
RF LOAD
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÌ
FRONT PANEL
POWER
METER
(OPTIONAL)*
OUT
RF
IN/OUT
2O DB PAD
(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)
NOTE: THE DIRECTIONAL COUPLER IS NOT USED WITH THE
CYBERTEST TEST SET. THE TX CABLE IS CONNECTED DIRECTLY
TO THE CYBERTEST TEST SET.
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
TX TEST
CABLE
CONTROL
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
IN
TX
TEST
CABLE
* A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN PLACE
OF THE COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET FOR TX
CALIBRATION/AUDIT
Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8935
HP-IB
TO GPIB
BOX
ÁÁ
Á
ÁÁ
Á
GPIB
CABLE
TX ANTENNA
PORT OR TX
RFDS
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLERS
ANTENNA PORT
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
RF IN/OUT
ON
BTS
GPIB ADRS
Advantest Model R3465
LAN
RS232-GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
LAN
RS232
NULL
MODEM
CABLE
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
GPIB
CONNECTS TO
BACK OF UNIT
G MODE
CDMA
LMF
INPUT
50-OHM
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
REF FW00094
3-50
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Test Equipment Set-up
68P09255A61-4
Figure 3-13: TX Calibration Test Setup (Advantest R3267, Agilent E4406A, and HP8935)
TEST SETS
TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP
Advantest Model R3267
POWER
SENSOR
100-W ATT (MIN)
NON-RADIA TING
RF LOAD
POWER
METER
(OPTIONAL)*
OUT
2O DB PAD
(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)
RF IN
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
TX TEST
CABLE
CONTROL
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
IN
TX
TEST
CABLE
Agilent E4406A
* A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN PLACE
OF THE COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET FOR TX
CALIBRATION/AUDIT
GPIB
CABLE
RF INPUT
50 Ω
TX ANTENNA
PORT OR TX
RFDS
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLERS
ANTENNA PORT
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8935
BTS
HP-IB
TO GPIB
BOX
ÁÁ
Á
ÁÁ
Á
GPIB ADRS
LAN
RS232-GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
LAN
G MODE
RS232
NULL
MODEM
CABLE
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
CDMA
LMF
RF IN/OUT
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
REF FW00094
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-51
Test Equipment Set-up
68P09255A61-4
Setup for Optimization/ATP
Figure 3-14 and Figure 3-15 show test set connections for IS-95 A/B
optimization/ATP tests. Figure 3-16 shows test set connections for
IS-95 A/B/C optimization/ATP tests.
Figure 3-14: Opt/ATP Test Setup Calibration (HP 8935)
TEST SET
Optimization/ATP SET UP
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED (4800E): BOTH THE TX AND RX
TEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP.
Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8935
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
HP-IB
TO GPIB
BOX
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
100-W ATT (MIN)
NON-RADIA TING
RF LOAD
RX
TEST
CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
CDMA
TIMEBASE
IN
EVEN
SECOND/SYNC
IN
RF
IN/OUT
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
RF IN/OUT
2O DB PAD FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ
(10 DB PAD FOR 800 MHZ)
TX
TEST
CABLE
RX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
RX DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
ANTENNA PORT
TX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
TX DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
ANTENNA PORT
BTS
FREQ
MONITOR
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
SYNC
MONITOR
LAN
GPIB ADRS
CSM
G MODE
RS232-GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
CDMA
LMF
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
REF FW00096
3-52
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Test Equipment Set-up
68P09255A61-4
Figure 3-15: Opt/ATP Test Setup (HP 8921A)
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8921A W/PCS Interface
(for 1700 and 1900 MHz)
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED (4800E): BOTH THE TX AND RX
TEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP.
OUT
100-W ATT (MIN)
NON-RADIA TING
RF LOAD
RX
TEST
CABLE
GPIB
CONNECTS
TO BACK OF
UNITS
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
IN
HP PCS INTERFACE
(FOR 1700 AND 1900 MHZ ONLY)
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
CDMA
TIMEBASE
IN
EVEN
SECOND/SYNC
IN
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
RF
IN/OUT
RF OUT
ONLY
2O DB PAD FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ
(10 DB PAD FOR 800 MHZ)
Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8921A
(for 800 MHz)
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
GPIB
CABLE
TX
TEST
CABLE
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
GPIB
CONNECTS
TO BACK OF
UNIT
RX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
RX DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
ANTENNA PORT
TX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
TX DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
ANTENNA PORT
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
BTS
RF
IN/OUT
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
FREQ
MONITOR
RF OUT
ONLY
ON
SYNC
MONITOR
LAN
GPIB ADRS
CSM
G MODE
RS232-GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
CDMA
LMF
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
REF FW00097
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-53
Test Equipment Set-up
68P09255A61-4
Figure 3-16: Opt/ATP Test Setup (Advantest R3267 and Agilent E4406A)
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
Advantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST
CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP.
TO EXT TRIG
ON REAR OF
SPECTRUM
ANALYZER
10 MHZ
REF OUT
OUT
RF IN
BNC
“T”
EXT TRIG IN
SYNTHE
REF IN
MOD TIME BASE IN
(EXT REF IN)
100-W ATT (MIN)
NON-RADIA TING
RF LOAD
RX
TEST
CABLE
SIGNAL GENERATOR
COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET
EVEN
SECOND/
SYNC IN
EXT
REF
IN
IN
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
RF OUT
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
NOTE:
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
2O DB PAD FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ
(10 DB PAD FOR 800 MHZ)
BNC
“T”
SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS
CONNECTED TO 10 MHZ REF OUT ON REAR OF
SPECTRUM ANALYZER.
GPIB
CABLE
TX
TEST
CABLE
Agilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)
RX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
RX DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
ANTENNA PORT
RF
OUTPUT
50 Ω
10
MHZ
IN
TX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
TX DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
ANTENNA PORT
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
BTS
10
MHZ
OUT
FREQ
MONITOR
RF
INPUT
50 Ω
TO PATTERN TRIG IN
ON REAR OF SIGNAL
GENERATOR
ON
SYNC
MONITOR
GPIB ADRS
CSM
TO TRIGGER IN
ON REAR OF
TRANSMITTER
TESTER
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
19.6608
MHZ
CLOCK
LAN
EXT REF IN
ON REAR OF
TRANSMITTER
TESTER
G MODE
RS232-GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
CDMA
LMF
BNC
“T”
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
REF FW00758
NOTE:
FOR MANUAL TESTING, GPIB MUST BE CONNECTED
BETWEEN THE ANALYZER AND THE SIGNAL
GENERATOR
3-54
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Test Equipment Set-up
68P09255A61-4
TX ATP Setup
Figure 3-17 shows a typical TX ATP setup.
Figure 3-17: Typical TX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler
TX ANTENNA DIRECTIONAL COUPLERS
COBRA RFDS Detail
RX
(RFM TX)
TX RF FROM BTS FRAME
TX
(RFM RX)
RFDS RX (RFM TX) COUPLER
OUTPUTS TO RFDS FWD(BTS)
ASU2 (SHADED) CONNECTORS
RF FEED LINE TO
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
REMOVED
Connect TX test cable between
the directional coupler input port
and the appropriate TX antenna
directional coupler connector.
Appropriate test sets and the port
names for all model test sets are
described in Table 3-22.
40W NON-RADIATING
RF LOAD
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
IN
RVS (REFLECTED)
PORT 50-OHM
TERMINATION
OUTPUT
PORT
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
BTS INPUT
PORT
TEST
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
NOTE:
THIS SETUP APPLIES TO BOTH
STARTER AND COMPANION FRAMES.
Aug 2002
TX
TEST
CABLE
TX TEST
CABLE
FWD
(INCIDENT)
PORT
REF FW00116
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-55
Test Equipment Set-up
68P09255A61-4
Figure 3-18: Typical RX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler
COBRA RFDS Detail
RX ANTENNA DIRECTIONAL COUPLERS
RX RF FROM BTS
FRAME
RX
(RFM TX)
TX
(RFM RX)
RFDS TX (RFM RX) COUPLER
OUTPUTS TO RFDS FWD(BTS)
ASU1 (SHADED) CONNECTORS
RF FEED LINE TO
TX ANTENNA
REMOVED
Connect RX test cable between
the test set and the appropriate
RX antenna directional coupler.
Appropriate test sets and the port
names for all model test sets are
described in Table 3-22.
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
OUT
RX Test
Cable
NOTE:
THIS SETUP APPLIES TO BOTH
STARTER AND EXPANSION FRAMES.
3-56
FW00115
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Test Set Calibration
68P09255A61-4
Test Set Calibration
Test Set Calibration Background
Proper test equipment calibration ensures that the test equipment and
associated test cables do not introduce measurement errors, and that
measurements are correct.
NOTE
If the test set being used to interface with the BTS has been
calibrated and maintained as a set, this procedure does not need
to be performed. (Test Set includes LMF terminal,
communications test set, additional test equipment, associated
test cables, and adapters.)
This procedure must be performed prior to beginning the optimization.
Verify all test equipment (including all associated test cables and
adapters actually used to interface all test equipment and the BTS) has
been calibrated and maintained as a set.
CAUTION
If any piece of test equipment, test cable, or RF adapter, that
makes up the calibrated test equipment set, has been replaced,
re-calibration must be performed. Failure to do so can introduce
measurement errors, resulting in incorrect measurements and
degradation to system performance.
NOTE
Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent test
equipment) must be performed at the site before calibrating the
overall test set. Calibrate the test equipment after it has been
allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.
Purpose of Test Set Calibration
These procedures access the LMF automated calibration routine used to
determine the path losses of the supported communications analyzer,
power meter, associated test cables, and (if used) antenna switch that
make up the overall calibrated test set. After calibration, the gain/loss
offset values are stored in a test measurement offset file on the LMF.
Selecting Test Equipment
Use LMF Options from the Options menu list to select test equipment
automatically (using the autodetect feature) or manually.
A Serial Connection and a Network Connection tab are provided for
test equipment selection. The Serial Connection tab is used when the
test equipment items are connected directly to the LMF computer via a
GPIB box (normal setup). The Network Connection tab is used when
the test equipment is to be connected remotely via a network connection.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
 Test equipment is correctly connected and turned on.
 CDMA LMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected to
the GPIB box.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-57
Test Set Calibration
68P09255A61-4
Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab
Test equipment can be manually specified before, or after, the test
equipment is connected. The LMF does not check to see if the test
equipment is actually detected for manual specification. Follow the
procedure in Table 3-24 to select test equipment manually.
Table 3-24: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab
 Step
Action
From the Tools menu, select Options.
The LMF Options window appears.
Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).
Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).
Click on the Manual Specification button (if not enabled).
Click on the check box corresponding to the test item(s) to be used.
NOTE
GPIB addresses can range from 1 through 30. The LMF will accept any address in that range, but
the numbers in the GPIB address boxes must match the addresses of the test equipment.
Motorola recommends that you use 1 for a CDMA signal generator, 13 for a power meter, and 18
for a CDMA analyzer. To verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB addresses of the test
equipment, refer to Appendix J.
Type the GPIB address in the corresponding GPIB address box.
Recommended Addresses
1 = CDMA Signal generator
13 = Power Meter
18 = CDMA Analyzer
Click on Apply. (The button darkens until the selection has been committed.)
NOTE
With manual selection, the LMF does not detect the test equipment to see if it is connected and
communicating with the LMF.
To verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB address of the test equipment, refer to Appendix J.
3-58
Click on Dismiss to close the test equipment window.
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Test Set Calibration
68P09255A61-4
Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab
When using the auto-detection feature to select test equipment, the LMF
examines which test equipment items are actually communicating with
the LMF. Follow the procedure in Table 3-25 to use the auto-detect
feature.
Table 3-25: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect
 Step
Action
From the Tools menu, select Options.
The LMF Options window appears.
Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).
Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).
Click on Auto-Detection (if not enabled).
NOTE
GPIB addresses can range from 1 through 30. The LMF will accept any address in that range, but
the numbers in the GPIB address to search box must match the addresses of the test equipment.
Motorola recommends that you use 1 for a CDMA signal generator, 13 for a power meter, and 18
for a CDMA analyzer. To verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB addresses of the test
equipment, refer to Appendix J.
Type the GPIB addresses in the box labeled GPIB address to search (if not already displayed).
NOTE
When both a power meter and an analyzer are selected, the LMF uses the first item that is capable
of performing the test and is listed in the GPIB addresses to search box for RF power
measurements (i.e., TX calibration). The address for a CDMA signal generator is normally 1, the
address for a power meter is normally 13, and the address for a CDMA analyzer is normally 18. If
1,13,18 is included in the GPIB addresses to search box, the power meter (13) is used for RF
power measurements. When the test equipment items are manually selected, the CDMA analyzer
is used only if a power meter is not selected.
Click on Apply.
NOTE
The button darkens until the selection has been committed. A check mark appears in the Manual
Configuration section for detected test equipment items.
Aug 2002
Click Dismiss to close the LMF Options window.
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-59
Test Set Calibration
68P09255A61-4
Calibrating Test Equipment
The calibrate test equipment function zeros the power measurement level
of the test equipment item that is to be used for TX calibration and audit.
If both a power meter and an analyzer are connected, only the power
meter is zeroed.
Use the Calibrate Test Equipment menu item from the Util menu to
calibrate test equipment. The test equipment must be selected before
calibration can begin. Follow the procedure in Table 3-26 to calibrate the
test equipment.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
 Test equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for tests
that are to be run.
 Test equipment has been selected.
Table 3-26: Test Equipment Calibration
 Step
3-60
Action
From the Util menu, select Calibrate Test Equipment.
A Directions window is displayed.
Follow the directions provided.
Click on Continue to close the Directions window.
A status report window is displayed.
Click on OK to close the status report window.
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Test Set Calibration
68P09255A61-4
Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester Self-alignment (Calibration)
The Agilent E4406A requires pre-calibration actions or calibration
verification that are not supported by the LMF. Follow the procedure in
Table 3-27 and refer to Figure 3-19 to perform the Agilent E4406A
self-alignment (calibration).
Table 3-27: Agilent E4406A Self-alignment (Calibration)
Step
Action
In the SYSTEM section of the instrument front panel, press the System key.
- The softkey labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen will change.
Press the Alignments softkey button to the right of the instrument screen.
- The softkey labels will change.
Press the Align All Now softkey button.
- All other instrument functions will be suspended during the alignment.
- The display will change to show progress and results of the alignments performed.
- The alignment will take less than one minute.
Figure 3-19: Agilent E4406A Self-alignment
Softkey Label
Display Area
System
Key
Softkey
Buttons
ti-CDMA-WP-00080-v01-ildoc-ftw
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-61
Test Set Calibration
68P09255A61-4
Calibrating Cables
The cable calibration function measures the loss (in dB) for the TX and
RX cables that are to be used for testing. A CDMA analyzer is used to
measure the loss of each cable configuration (TX cable configuration and
RX cable configuration). The cable calibration consists of the following:
 Measuring the loss of a short cable - This is required to compensate
for any measurement error of the analyzer. The short cable (used only
for the calibration process) is used in series with both the TX and RX
cable configuration when measuring. The measured loss of the short
cable is deducted from the measured loss of the TX and RX cable
configuration to determine the actual loss of the TX and RX cable
configurations. The result is then adjusted out of both the TX and RX
measurements to compensate for the measured loss.
 Measuring the short cable plus the RX cable configuration loss The RX cable configuration normally consists only of a coax cable
with type-N connectors that is long enough to reach from the BTS RX
port of the test equipment.
 Measuring the short cable plus the TX cable configuration loss The TX cable configuration normally consists of two coax cables with
type-N connectors and a directional coupler, a load, and an additional
attenuator (if required by the specified BTS). The total loss of the path
loss of the TX cable configuration must be as required for the BTS
(normally 30 or 50 dB).
Calibrating Cables with a CDMA Analyzer
Cable Calibration is used to calibrate both TX and RX test cables.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-28 to calibrate the cables. Figure 3-10
illustrates the cable calibration test equipment setup. Appendix F covers
the procedures for manual cable calibration.
NOTE
LMF cable calibration for PCS systems (1.7/1.9 GHz) cannot be
accomplished using an HP8921 analyzer with PCS interface or
an Advantest analyzer. A different analyzer type or the signal
generator and spectrum analyzer method must be used (refer to
Table 3-29 and Figure 3-20). Cable calibration values are then
manually entered.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
 Test equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for cable
calibration.
 Test equipment has been selected and calibrated.
3-62
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Test Set Calibration
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-28: Cable Calibration
 Step
Action
From the Util menu, select Cable Calibration.
A Cable Calibration window is displayed.
Enter a channel number(s) in the Channels box.
NOTE
Multiple channels numbers must be separated with a comma, no space (i.e., 200,800). When two
or more channels numbers are entered, the cables are calibrated for each channel. Interpolation is
accomplished for other channels as required for TX calibration.
Select TX and RX Cable Cal, TX Cable Cal, or RX Cable Cal in the Cable Calibration pick
list.
Click OK. Follow the direction displayed for each step.
A status report window displays the results of the cable calibration.
Calibrating TX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer
Follow the procedure in Table 3-29 to calibrate the TX cables using a
signal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-20 for a
diagram of the signal generator and spectrum analyzer.
Table 3-29: Calibrating TX Cables Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer
 Step
Action
Connect a short test cable between the spectrum analyzer and the signal generator.
Set signal generator to 0 dBm at the customer frequency of:
- 869-894 MHz for 800 MHz CDMA
- 1930-1990 MHz for North American PCS.
- 1840-1870 MHz for Korean PCS
Use a spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-20, A) and record the
value.
Connect the spectrum analyzer’s short cable to point B, (as shown in the lower right portion of the
diagram) to measure cable output at customer frequency of:
- 869-894 MHz for 800 MHz CDMA
- 1930-1990 MHz for North American PCS.
- 1840-1870 MHz for Korean PCS
Record the value at point B.
Calibration factor = A - B
Example:
Cal = -1 dBm - (-53.5 dBm) = 52.5 dB
NOTE
The short cable is used for calibration only. It is not part of the final test setup. After calibration is
completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, to ensure test procedures
use the correct calibration factor.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-63
Test Set Calibration
68P09255A61-4
Figure 3-20: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX BLO and TX ATP Tests
Signal
Generator
Spectrum
Analyzer
SHORT
TEST
CABLE
40W NON-RADIATING
RF LOAD
THIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TO
THE TX PORTS DURING TX BAY LEVEL
OFFSET TEST AND TX ATP TESTS.
50 OHM
TERMINATION
Spectrum
Analyzer
ONE 20DB 20 W IN
LINE ATTENUATOR
SHORT TEST CABLE
THIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TO THE HP8481A POWER
SENSOR DURING TX BAY LEVEL OFFSET TEST AND TO THE
PCS INTERFACE BOX INPUT PORT DURING TX ATP TESTS.
Signal
Generator
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
CABLE FROM 20 DB @ 20W ATTENUATOR TO THE
PCS INTERFACE OR THE HP8481A POWER SENSOR.
FW00293
Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer
Follow the procedure in Table 3-30 to calibrate the RX cables using the
signal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-21, if required.
Table 3-30: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer
 Step
3-64
Action
Connect a short test cable to the spectrum analyzer and connect the other end to the Signal
Generator.
Set signal generator to -10 dBm at the customer’s RX frequency of:
- 824-849 for 800 MHz CDMA
- 1850-1910 MHz band for North American PCS
- 1750-1780 MHz for Korean PCS
Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-21, A) and record the
value for A.
Connect the test setup, as shown in the lower portion of the diagram to measure the output at the
customer’s RX frequency of:
- 824-849 for 800 MHz CDMA
- 1850-1910 MHz band for North American PCS
- 1750-1780 MHz for Korean PCS
Record the value at point B.
. . . continued on next page
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Test Set Calibration
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-30: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer
 Step
Action
Calibration factor = A - B
Example:
Cal = -12 dBm - (-14 dBm) = 2 dBm
NOTE
The short test cable is used for test equipment setup calibration only. It is not be part of the final
test setup. After calibration is completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup,
as is, to ensure test procedures use the correct calibration factor.
Figure 3-21: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP Test
Signal
Generator
Signal
Generator
Spectrum
Analyzer
SHORT
TEST
CABLE
CONNECTION TO THE HP PCS
INTERFACE OUTPUT PORT
DURING RX MEASUREMENTS.
Spectrum
Analyzer
SHORT TEST
CABLE
BULLET
CONNECTOR
LONG
CABLE 2
CONNECTION TO THE RX PORTS
DURING RX MEASUREMENTS.
Aug 2002
FW00294
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-65
Test Set Calibration
68P09255A61-4
Setting Cable Loss Values
Cable loss values for the TX and RX test cable configurations are
normally set by accomplishing cable calibration using the applicable test
equipment. The resulting values are stored in the cable loss files. The
cable loss values can also be set/changed manually. Follow the procedure
in Table 3-31 to set cable loss values.
Prerequisites
 Logged into the BTS
Table 3-31: Setting Cable Loss Values
Step
Action
Click on the Util menu.
Select Edit>Cable Loss>TX or RX.
A data entry pop-up window appears.
To add a new channel number, click on the Add Row button, then click in the Channel # and Loss
(dBm) columns and enter the desired values.
To edit existing values, click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.
To save displayed values, click on the Save button.
To exit the window, click on the Dismiss button.
Values entered/changed after the Save button was used are not saved.
NOTE
 If cable loss values exist for two different channels, the LMF will interpolate for all other channels.
 Entered values are used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and login.
3-66
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Test Set Calibration
68P09255A61-4
Setting Coupler Loss Values
If an in-service coupler is installed, the coupler loss (e.g., 30 dB) must
be manually entered so it will be included in the LMF TX calibration
and audit calculations and RX FER Test. Follow the procedure in
Table 3-32 to set coupler loss values.
Prerequisites
 Logged into the BTS.
Table 3-32: Setting Coupler Loss Value
Step
Action
Click on the Util menu.
Select Edit>Coupler Loss>TX or RX. A data entry pop-up window appears.
Click in the Loss (dBm) column for each carrier that has a coupler and enter the appropriate value.
To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
Click on the Save button to save displayed values.
Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window.
Values entered/changed after the Save button was used are not saved.
NOTE
 The In-Service Calibration check box in the Tools>Options>BTS Options tab must be checked
before entered coupler loss values are used by the TX calibration and audit functions or RX FER
test.
 Entered values are used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and login.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-67
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P09255A61-4
Bay Level Offset Calibration
Introduction to Bay Level Offset Calibration
Calibration compensates for normal equipment variations within the
BTS and assures maximum measurement accuracy.
RF Path Bay Level Offset Calibration
Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path (BBX
slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in a BLO database calibration
table in the LMF. The BLOs are subsequently downloaded to each BBX.
For starter frames, each receive path starts at a BTS RX antenna port and
terminates at a backplane BBX slot. Each transmit path starts at a BBX
backplane slot, travels through the LPA, and terminates at a BTS TX
antenna port.
For expansion frames each receive path starts at the BTS RX port of the
cell site starter frame, travels through the frame-to-frame expansion
cable, and terminates at a backplane BBX slot of the expansion frame.
The transmit path starts at a BBX backplane slot of the expansion frame,
travels though the LPA, and terminates at a BTS TX antenna port of the
same expansion frame.
Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path (BBX
slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in a BLO database. Each
transmit path starts at a C-CCP shelf backplane BBX slot, travels
through the LPA, and ends at a BTS TX antenna port. When the TX path
calibration is performed, the RX path BLO is automatically set to the
default value.
At omni sites, BBX slots 1 and 13 (redundant) are tested. At sector sites,
BBX slots 1 through 12, and 13 (redundant) are tested. Only those slots
(sectors) actually equipped in the current CDF are tested, regardless of
physical BBX board installation in the slot.
When to Calibrate BLOs
Calibration of BLOs is required:
 After initial BTS installation
 Once each year
 After replacing any of the following components or associated
interconnecting RF cabling:
- BBX board
- C-CCP shelf
- CIO card
- CIO to LPA backplane RF cable
- LPA backplane
- LPA
- TX filter / TX filter combiner
- TX thru-port cable to the top of frame
3-68
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P09255A61-4
TX Path Calibration
The TX Path Calibration assures correct site installation, cabling, and the
first order functionality of all installed equipment. The proper function
of each RF path is verified during calibration. The external test
equipment is used to validate/calibrate the TX paths of the BTS.
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT
connector you must first verify that there are no CDMA
channels keyed. Have the OMC-R place the sector assigned to
the LPA under test OOS. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury and/or equipment damage.
CAUTION
Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap while
handling any circuit card/module. If this is not done, there is a
high probability that the card/module could be damaged by ESD.
NOTE
At new site installations, to facilitate the complete test of each
CCP shelf (if the shelf is not already fully populated with BBX
boards), move BBX boards from shelves currently not under test
and install them into the empty BBX slots of the shelf currently
being tested to insure that all BBX TX paths are tested.
- This procedure can be bypassed on operational sites that are
due for periodic optimization.
- Prior to testing, view the CDF file to verify the correct
BBX slots are equipped. Edit the file as required to include
BBX slots not currently equipped (per Systems
Engineering documentation).
BLO Calibration Data File
During the calibration process, the LMF creates a bts-n.cal calibration
(BLO) offset data file in the bts-n folder. After calibration has been
completed, this offset data must be downloaded to the BBXs using the
Download BLO function. An explanation of the file is shown below.
NOTE
Due to the size of the file, Motorola recommends that you print
out a hard copy of a bts.cal file and refer to it for the following
descriptions.
The CAL file is subdivided into sections organized on a per slot basis (a
slot Block).
Slot 1 contains the calibration data for the 12 BBX slots. Slot 20
contains the calibration data for the redundant BBX. Each BBX slot
header block contains:
 A creation Date and Time - broken down into separate parameters of
createMonth, createDay, createYear, createHour, and createMin.
 The number of calibration entries - fixed at 720 entries corresponding
to 360 calibration points of the CAL file including the slot header and
actual calibration data.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-69
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P09255A61-4
 The calibration data for a BBX is organized as a large flat array. The
array is organized by branch, sector, and calibration point.
- The first breakdown of the array indicates which branch the
contained calibration points are for. The array covers transmit, main
receive and diversity receive offsets as follows:
Table 3-33: BLO BTS.cal File Array Assignments
NOTE
Range
Assignment
C[1]-C[240]
Transmit
C[241]-C[480]
Main Receive
C[481]-C[720]
Diversity Receive
Slot 385 is the BLO for the RFDS.
- The second breakdown of the array is per sector. Configurations
supported are Omni, 3-sector or 6-sector.
Table 3-34: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector)
BBX
Sectorization
TX
RX
RX Diversity
Slot[1] (Primary BBXs 1 through 12)
1 (Omni)
6 Sector,
1st
Carrier
10
6 Sector,
2nd
Carrier
11
12
3-Sector ,
1st
Carrier
3-Sector ,
3rd
Carrier
3-Sector ,
2nd
Carrier
3-Sector ,
4th
Carrier
C[1]-C[20]
C[241]-C[260]
C[481]-C[500]
C[21]-C[40]
C[261]-C[280]
C[501]-C[520]
C[41]-C[60]
C[281]-C[300]
C[521]-C[540]
C[61]-C[80]
C[301]-C[320]
C[541]-C[560]
C[81]-C[100]
C[321]-C[340]
C[561]-C[580]
C[101]-C[120]
C[341]-C[360]
C[581]-C[600]
C[121]-C[140]
C[361]-C[380]
C[601]-C[620]
C[141]-C[160]
C[381]-C[400]
C[621]-C[640]
C[161]-C[180]
C[401]-C[420]
C[641]-C[660]
C[181]-C[200]
C[421]-C[440]
C[661]-C[680]
C[201]-C[220]
C[441]-C[460]
C[681]-C[700]
C[221]-C[240]
C[461]-C[480]
C[701]-C[720]
Slot[20]] (Redundant BBX-13)
1 (Omni)
6 Sector,
1st
Carrier
3-Sector ,
1st
Carrier
3-Sector ,
3rd
Carrier
C[1]-C[20]
C[241]-C[260]
C[481]-C[500]
C[21]-C[40]
C[261]-C[280]
C[501]-C[520]
C[41]-C[60]
C[281]-C[300]
C[521]-C[540]
C[61]-C[80]
C[301]-C[320]
C[541]-C[560]
C[81]-C[100]
C[321]-C[340]
C[561]-C[580]
C[101]-C[120]
C[341]-C[360]
C[581]-C[600]
. . . continued on next page
3-70
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-34: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector)
BBX
Sectorization
10
11
12
6 Sector,
2nd
Carrier
3-Sector ,
2nd
Carrier
3-Sector ,
4th
Carrier
TX
RX
RX Diversity
C[121]-C[140]
C[361]-C[380]
C[601]-C[620]
C[141]-C[160]
C[381]-C[400]
C[621]-C[640]
C[161]-C[180]
C[401]-C[420]
C[641]-C[660]
C[181]-C[200]
C[421]-C[440]
C[661]-C[680]
C[201]-C[220]
C[441]-C[460]
C[681]-C[700]
C[221]-C[240]
C[461]-C[480]
C[701]-C[720]
 Ten calibration points per sector are supported for each branch. Two
entries are required for each calibration point.
 The first value (all odd entries) refer to the CDMA channel
(frequency) where the BLO is measured. The second value (all even
entries) is the power set level. The valid range for PwrLvlAdj is from
2500 to 27500 (2500 corresponds to -125 dBm and 27500
corresponds to +125 dBm).
 The 20 calibration entries for each sector/branch combination must be
stored in order of increasing frequency. If less than 10 points
(frequencies) are calibrated, the largest frequency that is calibrated is
repeated to fill out the 10 points.
Example:
C[1]=384,
odd cal entry
= 1 ‘‘calibration point”
C[2]=19102, even cal entry
C[3]=777,
C[4]=19086,
C[19]=777,
C[20]=19086, (since only two cal points were calibrated this
would be repeated for the next 8 points)
 When the BBX is loaded with image = data, the cal file data for the
BBX is downloaded to the device in the order it is stored in the cal
file. TxCal data is sent first, C[1] - C[240]. Sector 1’s ten calibration
points are sent (C[1] - C[20]) followed by sector 2’s ten calibration
points (C[21] - C[40]), etc. The RxCal data is sent next (C[241] C[480]), followed by the RxDCal data (C[481] - C[720]).
 Temperature compensation data is also stored in the cal file for each
set.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-71
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P09255A61-4
Test Equipment Setup: RF Path Calibration
Follow the procedure in Table 3-35 to set up test equipment.
Table 3-35: Test Equipment Setup (RF Path Calibration)
Step
Action
NOTE
Verify the GPIB controller is properly connected and turned on.
! CAUTION
To prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX) test connections must be via the 30 dB
directional coupler for 800 MHz with an additional 20 dB in-line attenuator for 1.7/1.9 GHz.
Connect the LMF computer terminal to the BTS LAN A connector on the BTS (if you have not
already done so). Refer to the procedure in Table 3-2 on page 3-6.
 If required, calibrate the test equipment per the procedure in Table 3-26 on page 3-60.
 Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-12 on page 3-50.
TX Path Calibration
The assigned channel frequency and power level (as measured at the top
of the frame) for transmit calibration are derived from the site CDF files.
For each BBX, the channel frequency is specified in the ChannelList
CDF file parameter and the power is specified in the SIFPilotPwr
CDF file parameter for the sector associated with the BBX (located
under the ParentSECTOR field of the ParentCARRIER CDF file
parameter).
NOTE
If both the BTS-x.cdf and CBSC-x.cdf files are current, all
information will be correct on the LMF. If not, the carrier and
channel will have to be set for each test.
The calibration procedure attempts to adjust the power to within +0.5 dB
of the desired power. The calibration will pass if the error is less than
+1.5 dB.
The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITHOUT the directional coupler
option, is approximately 42.0 dB ±3.0 dB.
 At sites WITHOUT RFDS option, BLO is approximately
42.0 dB ±4.0 dB. A typical example would be TX output power
measured at BTS (36.0 dBm) minus the BBX TX output level
(approximately -6.0 dBm) would equate to 42 dB BLO.
The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITH the directional coupler option,
is approximately 41.4 dB ±3.0 dB. TX BLO = Frame Power Output
minus BBX output level.
 Example: TX output power measured at RFDS TX coupler
(39.4 dBm) minus the BBX TX output level (approximately
-2.0 dBm) and RFDS directional coupler/cable (approximately
-0.6 dBm) would equate to 41.4 dB BLO.
The LMF Tests menu list items, TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit,
perform the TX BLO Calibration test for a XCVR(s). The All Cal/Audit
menu item performs TX calibration, downloads BLO, and performs TX
audit if the TX calibration passes. All measurements are made through
the appropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.
3-72
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P09255A61-4
Rate Set Drop-down Pick List
The Rate Set Drop-down Box is enabled if at least one MCC card is
selected for the test. The available options for TX tests are 1 = 9600, and
3 = 9600 1X. Option 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the
test. The available transfer rate options for RX tests are 1 = 9600 and
2 = 14400. Option 2 is only available if no 1X cards are selected.
Verify BLO
In both the TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit dialog boxes, a Verify
BLO checkbox is provided and checked by default. After the actual TX
calibration is completed during either the TX Calibration or All
Cal/Audit process, the BLO derived from the calibration is compared to
a standard, acceptable BLO tolerance for the BTS. In some installations,
additional items may be installed in the transmit path. The additional
change in gain from these items could cause BLO verification failure
and, therefore, failure of the entire calibration. In these cases, either the
Verify BLO checkbox should be unchecked or the additional path losses
should be added into each applicable sector using the
Util>Edit>TX Coupler Loss... function.
Single-sided BLO
Another option that appears in the pull-down menu is Single-sided
BLO. Normally valid BLO values are some value plus-or-minus some
offset. The ranges that we currently use for calibration are wider than
necessary to accommodate the redundant BBX. The lower half of that
range is where non-redundant BBXs should be. When Single-sided
BLO is selected, the result is only considered a success if it is in the
lower half of the range. If it was normally a success from 37-47 (which
is 42 "5), Single-sided BLO would make it a success only if the result
was from 37-42. To get the more stringent conditions, the operator
checks Single-sided BLO when calibrating non-redundant transceivers.
Single-sided BLO carries the likelihood of more failures. This option
should only be used by experienced CFEs.
Test Pattern
The TESTS_TX CAL menu has a Test Pattern pull-down menu. This
menu has the following choices:
 Pilot (default) - performs tests using a pilot signal only. This pattern
should be used when running in-service tests. It only requires a BBX
to do the test.
 Standard - performs the tests using pilot, synch, paging and six
traffic channels. This pattern should be used on all non-in-service
tests. Standard requires a BBX and an MCC. Standard uses gain
values specified by the IS97 standard.
 CDFPilot -performs the tests using the pilot signal, however, the gain
is specified in the CDF file. Advanced users may use CDFPilot to
generate a Pilot pattern using the value specified by the PilotGain
parameter in the CDF file instead of a pre-determined value.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-73
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P09255A61-4
 CDF - performs the tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic
channels, however, the gain for the channel elements is specified in
the CDF file. Advanced users may use CDF to generate a standard
pattern. Instead of using the values specified by IS97, the settings for
the following CDF parameters are used:
- PilotGain
- PchGain
- SchGain
- NomGain1Way
Prerequisites
Before running this test, ensure that the following have been done:
 CSM-1, GLIs, MCCs, and BBXs have correct code load and data
load.
 Primary CSM and MGLI are INS.
 All BBXs are OOS_RAM.
 Test equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
BLO calibration.
 LMF is logged into the BTS.
Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-12 and follow the
procedure in Table 3-36 to perform the TX calibration test.
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT
connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channels
keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury
and/or equipment damage.
NOTE
Verify all BBX boards removed and repositioned have been
returned to their assigned shelves/slots. Any BBX boards moved
since they were downloaded will have to be downloaded again.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-36 to perform the TX calibration test.
Table 3-36: BTS TX Path Calibration
 Step
Action
Select the BBX(s) to be calibrated.
NOTE
If STANDARD or CDF is selected for TEST PATTERN, then at least one MCC must be also
selected.
From the Tests menu, select TX>TX Calibration or All Cal/Audit.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list. (Press and hold the
 or  key to select multiple items.)
Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Select Verify BLO (default) or Single-sided BLO.
NOTE
Single-sided BLO is only used when checking non-redundant transceivers.
. . . continued on next page
3-74
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-36: BTS TX Path Calibration
 Step
Action
From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern.
NOTE
 Selecting Pilot (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only.
 Selecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels. This
requires an MCC to be selected.
 Selecting CDFPilot performs tests using a pilot signal, however, the gain for the channel
elements is specified in the CDF file.
 Selecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels, however, the
gain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.
Click on OK.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
A status report window displays the test results.
Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.
Exception Handling
In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL
message in the status report window and provides information in the
Description field.
Recheck the test setup and connection and re-run the test. If the tests fail
again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,
Troubleshooting.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-75
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P09255A61-4
Download BLO Procedure
After a successful TX path calibration, download the bay level offset
(BLO) calibration file data to the BBXs. BLO data is extracted from the
CAL file for the Base Transceiver Subsystem (BTS) and downloaded to
the selected BBX devices.
NOTE
If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this procedure
does not need to be performed, as BLO is downloaded as part of
the All Cal/Audit.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
 BBXs being downloaded are OOS-RAM (yellow).
 TX calibration is successfully completed.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-37 to download the BLO data to the
BBXs.
Table 3-37: Download BLO
 Step
Action
Select the BBX(s) to be downloaded.
From the Device menu, select Download>BLO.
A status report window displays the result of the download.
NOTE
Selected device(s) do not change color when BLO is downloaded.
Click on OK to close the status report window.
Calibration Audit Introduction
The BLO calibration audit procedure confirms the successful generation
and storage of the BLO calibration offsets. The calibration audit
procedure measures the path gain or loss of every BBX transmit path at
the site. In this test, actual system tolerances are used to determine the
success or failure of a test. The same external test equipment set up is
used.
NOTE
3-76
RF path verification, BLO calibration, and BLO data download
to BBXs must have been successfully completed prior to
performing the calibration audit.
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P09255A61-4
TX Path Audit
Perform the calibration audit of the TX paths of all equipped BBX slots
per the procedure in Table 3-38
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT
connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channels
keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury
and/or equipment damage.
NOTE
If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this procedure
does not need to be performed, as BLO is downloaded as part of
the All Cal/Audit.
TX Audit Test
The Tests menu item, TX Audit, performs the TX BLO Audit test for a
BBX(s). All measurements are made through the appropriate TX output
connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, ensure that the following have been done:
CSM-1, GLIs, and BBXs have correct code load and data load.
Primary CSM and MGLI are INS.
All BBXs are OOS_RAM.
Test equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
BLO calibration.
 LMF is logged into the BTS.
Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-12 or Figure 3-13.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-38 to perform the BTS TX Path Audit
test.
Table 3-38: BTS TX Path Audit
 Step
Action
Select the BBX(s) to be audited.
NOTE
If STANDARD or CDF is selected for Test Pattern, then at least one MCC must be also selected.
From the Tests menu, select TX>TX Audit.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.
Press and hold the  or  key to select multiple items.
Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
If at least one MCC was selected in Step 1, select the appropriate transfer rate (1 = 9600, 3 = 9600
1X) from the drop-down list in the Rate Set box.
NOTE
The rate selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.
Select Verify BLO (default) or Single-sided BLO.
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-77
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-38: BTS TX Path Audit
 Step
Action
NOTE
Single-sided BLO is only used when checking non-redundant transceivers.
From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern.
NOTE
 Selecting Pilot (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only.
 Selecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels. This
requires an MCC to be selected.
 Selecting CDFPilot performs tests using a pilot signal, however, the gain for the channel
elements is specified in the CDF file.
 Selecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels, however, the
gain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.
Click on OK.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
A status report window displays the test results.
Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.
10
Exception Handling
In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL
message in the Status Report window and provides information in the
Description field. Recheck the test setup and connection and re-run the
test. If the tests fail again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to
Chapter 6, Troubleshooting.
3-78
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P09255A61-4
All Cal/Audit Test
The Tests menu item, All Cal/Audit, performs the TX BLO Calibration
and Audit test for a XCVR(s). All measurements are made through the
appropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.
NOTE
If the TX calibration portion of the test passes, the BLO data is
automatically downloaded to the BBX(s) before the audit portion
of the test is run.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, ensure that the following have been done:
CSM-1, GLIs, BBXs have correct code and data loads.
Primary CSM and MGLI are INS.
All BBXs are OOS_RAM.
Test equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
BLO calibration.
 LMF is logged into the BTS.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-39 to perform the All Cal/Audit test.
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT
connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channels
keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury
and/or equipment damage.
Table 3-39: All Cal/Audit Test
 Step
Action
Select the BBX(s) to be tested.
NOTE
If STANDARD, CDFPilot, or CDF is selected for the TEST PATTERN, then at least one MCC
must be also selected.
From the Tests menu, select All Cal/Audit.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.
Press and hold the  or  key to select multiple items.
Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
If at least one MCC was selected in Step1 select the appropriate transfer rate (1 = 9600, 3 = 9600
1X) from the drop-down list in the Rate Set box.
NOTE
The rate selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.
Select Verify BLO or Single-sided BLO.
NOTE
Single-sided BLO is only used when checking non-redundant transceivers.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-79
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-39: All Cal/Audit Test
 Step
Action
From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern.
NOTE
 Selecting Pilot (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only.
 Selecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and 6 traffic channels. This
requires an MCC to be selected.
 Selecting CDFPilot performs tests using a pilot signal, however, the gain for the channel
elements is specified in the CDF file.
 Selecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and 6 traffic channels, however, the
gain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.
Click on OK.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
A status report window displays the test results.
Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.
10
3-80
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P09255A61-4
Create CAL File
The Create Cal File function gets the BLO data from BBXs and
creates/updates the CAL file for the BTS. If a CAL file does not exist, a
new one is created. If a CAL file already exists, it is updated. After a
BTS has been fully optimized, a copy of the CAL file must exist so it
can be transferred to the CBSC. If TX calibration has been successfully
performed for all BBXs and BLO data has been downloaded, a CAL file
exists. Note the following:
 The Create Cal File function only applies to selected (highlighted)
BBXs.
WARNING
The user is not encouraged to edit the CAL file as this action can
cause interface problems between the BTS and the LMF. To
manually edit the CAL file, you must first logout of the BTS. If
you manually edit the CAL file and then use the Create Cal File
function, the edited information is lost.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, the following should be done:
 LMF is logged into the BTS.
 BBXs are OOS_RAM with BLO downloaded.
Table 3-40: Create CAL File
 Step
Action
Select the applicable BBXs.
NOTE
The CAL file is only updated for the selected BBXs.
Click on the Device menu.
Click on the Create Cal File menu item.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
Click OK to close the status report window.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-81
RFDS Set-up and Calibration
68P09255A61-4
RFDS Set-up and Calibration
RFDS Description
NOTE
The RFDS is not available for the -48 V BTS at the time of this
publication.
The optional RFDS performs RF tests of the site from the CBSC or from
an LMF. The RFDS consists of the following elements:
 Antenna Select Unit (ASU)
 Fixed Wireless Terminal Interface Card (FWTIC)
 Subscriber Unit Assembly (SUA)
For complete information regarding the RFDS, refer to the CDMA RFDS
Hardware Installation manual and CDMA RFDS User’s Guide.
The LMF provides the following functions for RFDS equipment:
3-82
TX and RX Calibration
Dekey Test Subscriber Unit (TSU)
Download Test Subscriber Interface Card (TSIC)
Forward Test
Key TSU
Measure TSU Receive Signal Strength Indication (RSSI)
Ping TSU
Program TSU Number Assignment Module (NAM)
Reverse Test
RGLI actions (for GLI based RFDS units)
Set ASU
Status TSU
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
RFDS Set-up and Calibration
68P09255A61-4
RFDS Parameter Settings
The bts-#.cdf file includes RFDS parameter settings that must
match the installed RFDS equipment. The paragraphs below describe the
editable parameters and their defaults. Table 3-41 explains how to edit
the parameter settings.
 RfdsEquip - valid inputs are 0 through 2.
0 = (default) RFDS is not equipped
1 = Non-Cobra/Patzer box RFDS
2 = Cobra RFDS
 TsuEquip - valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) TSU not equipped
1 = TSU is equipped in the system
 MC1....4 - valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) Not equipped
1 = Multicouplers equipped in RFDS system
(9600 system RFDS only)
 Asu1/2Equip - valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) Not equipped
1 = Equipped
 TestOrigDN - valid inputs are ’’’ (default) or a numerical string up to
15 characters. (This is the phone number the RFDS dials when
originating a call. A dummy number needs to be set up by the switch,
and is to be used in this field.)
NOTE
Aug 2002
Any text editor supporting the LMF may be used to open any
text files to verify, view, or modify data.
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-83
RFDS Set-up and Calibration
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-41: RFDS Parameter Settings
Step
Action
NOTE
Log out of the BTS prior to performing this procedure.
Using a text editor, verify the following fields are set correctly in the bts-#.cdf file
(1 = GLI based RFDS; 2 = Cobra RFDS).
EXAMPLE:
Asu1Equip = 1
Asu2Equip = 0 (1 if system is non-duplexed)
Mc1Equip = 0
Mc2Equip = 0
Mc3Equip = 0
Mc4Equip = 0
RfdsEquip = 2
TestOrigDN = ’123456789’
TsuEquip = 1
NOTE
The above is an example of the bts-#.cdf file that should have been generated by the OMC and
copied to the LMF. These fields will have been set by the OMC if the RFDSPARM database is
modified for the RFDS.
Save and/or quit the editor. If any changes were made to these fields, data will need to be downloaded
to the GLI (see Step 3, otherwise proceed to Step 4).
To download to the GLI, click on the Device menu and select the Download>Code/Data menu item
(selected devices do not change color when data is downloaded).
A status report window displays the status of the download.
Click OK to close the status report window.
! CAUTION
After downloading data to the GLI, the RFDS LED slowly begins flashing red and green for
approximately 2-3 minutes. DO NOT attempt to perform any functions with the RFDS until the LED
remains green.
Status the RFDS TSU.
A status report window displays the software version number for the TSIC and SUA.
NOTE
If the LMF yields an error message, check the following:
3-84
Ensure the AMR cable is correctly connected from the BTS to the RFDS.
Verify the RFDS has power.
Verify the RFDS status LED is green.
Verify fields in the bts-#.cdf file are correct (see Step 1).
Status the MGLI and ensure the device is communicating (via Ethernet) with the LMF, and the
device is in the proper state (INS).
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
RFDS Set-up and Calibration
68P09255A61-4
RFDS TSU NAM Programming
The RFDS TSU NAM must be programmed with the appropriate system
parameters and phone number during hardware installation. The TSU
phone and TSU MSI must be recorded for each BTS used for OMC-R
RFDS software configuration. The TSU NAM should be configured the
same way that any local mobile subscriber would use.
NOTE
The user will only need to program the NAM for the initial
install of the RFDS.
The NAM must be programmed into the SUA before it can receive and
process test calls, or be used for any type of RFDS test.
Explanation of Parameters used when Programming the TSU NAM
Table 3-42 defines the parameters used when editing the tsu.nam file.
Table 3-42: Definition of Parameters
Access_Overload_Code
Slot_Index
System ID
Network ID
These parameters are obtained from the switch.
Primary_Channel_A
Primary_Channel_B
Secondary_Channel_A
Secondary_Channel B
These parameters are the channels used in operation of the system.
Lock_Code
Security_Code
Service_Level
Station_Class_Mark
Do not change.
IMSI_11_12
IMSI_MCC
These fields can be obtained at the OMC using the following
command:
OMC000>disp bts-# imsi
If the fields are blank, replace the IMSI fields in the NAM file to 0,
otherwise use the values displayed by the OMC.
MIN_1 Phone Number
This field is the phone number assigned to the mobile. The ESN and
MIN should be entered into the switch as well.
NOTE: This field is different from the TestOrigDN field in the
bts.cdf file. The MIN is the phone number of the RFDS subscriber,
and the TestOrigDN is the number the subscriber calls.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-85
RFDS Set-up and Calibration
68P09255A61-4
Valid NAM Ranges
Table 3-43 provides the valid NAM field ranges. If any of the fields are
missing or out of range, the RFDS errors out.
Table 3-43: Valid NAM Field Ranges
Valid Range
Minimum
Maximum
15
Slot_Index
System ID
32767
Network ID
32767
Primary_Channel_A
25
1175
Primary_Channel_B
25
1175
Secondary_Channel_A
25
1175
Secondary_Channel_B
25
1175
Lock_Code
999
Security_Code
999999
Service_Level
Station_Class_Mark
255
IMSI_11_12
99
IMSI_MCC
999
N/A
N/A
NAM Field Name
Access_Overload_Code
MIN Phone Number
Set Antenna Map Data
The antenna map data is only used for RFDS tests and is required if an
RFDS is installed. Antenna map data does not have to be entered if an
RFDS is not installed. The antenna map data must be entered manually.
Perform the procedure in Table 3-44 to set the Antenna Map Data.
Prerequisite
 Logged into the BTS
Table 3-44: Set Antenna Map Data
Step
Action
Click on the Util menu.
Select Edit>Antenna Map.
A data entry pop-up window appears with a tab for TX and a tab for RX.
Enter/edit values as required for each carrier.
NOTE
Refer to the Util >Edit-antenna map LMF help screen for antenna map examples.
Click on the Save button to save displayed values.
. . . continued on next page
3-86
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
RFDS Set-up and Calibration
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-44: Set Antenna Map Data
Step
Action
NOTE
Entered values are used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and login.
Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window.
NOTE
Values entered/changed after using the Save button are not saved.
Set RFDS Configuration Data
If an RFDS is installed, the RFDS configuration data must be manually
entered. Perform the procedure in Table 3-45 to set the RFDS
Configuration Data.
Prerequisite
 Logged into the BTS.
NOTE
The entered antenna# index numbers must correspond to the
antenna# index numbers used in the antenna maps.
Table 3-45: Set RFDS Configuration Data
Step
Action
Click on the Util menu.
Select Edit>RFDS Configuration.
A data entry pop-up window appears with a tab for TX and a tab for RX.
To add a new antenna number, click on the Add Row button, then click in the other columns and enter
the desired data.
To edit existing values, click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
NOTE
Refer to the Util >Edit-RFDS Configuration LMF help screen for RFDS configuration data
examples.
To delete a row, click on the row and click on the Delete Row button.
To save displayed values, click on the Save button.
NOTE
 Entered values are used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and login.
To exit the window, click on the Dismiss button .
NOTE
Values entered/changed after using the Save button are not saved.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-87
RFDS Set-up and Calibration
68P09255A61-4
RFDS Calibration
The RFDS TX and RX antenna paths must be calibrated to ensure peak
performance. The RFDS calibration option calibrates the RFDS TX and
RX paths.
For a TX antenna path calibration, the BTS XCVR is keyed at a
pre-determined power level and the BTS power output level is measured
by the RFDS. The power level is then measured at the TX antenna
directional coupler by the power measuring test equipment item being
used (power meter or analyzer). The difference (offset) between the
power level at the RFDS and the power level at the TX antenna
directional coupler is used as the TX RFDS calibration offset value.
For an RX antenna path calibration, the RFDS is keyed at a
pre-determined power level and the power input level is measured by the
BTS XCVR. A CDMA signal at the same power level measured by the
BTS XCVR is then injected at the RX antenna directional coupler by the
RFDS keyed power level and the power level measured at the BTS
XCVR is the RFDS RX calibration offset value.
The TX and RX RFDS calibration offset values are written to the CAL
file.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
 BBXs are OOS_RAM.
 Cable calibration has been performed
 TX calibration has been performed and BLO has been downloaded for
the BTS.
 Test equipment has been connected correctly for a TX calibration.
 Test equipment has been selected and calibrated.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-46 to calibrate the TX and RX antenna
paths.
Table 3-46: RFDS Calibration Procedure
 Step
Action
Select the BTS tab.
Select the B (for BTS) radio button.
Select the BBX to use during the test.
Select the RFDS menu.
Select the RFDS Calibration menu item.
Select the appropriate direction (TX or RX) in the Direction pick list.
Type the appropriate channel number(s) in the Channel box.
NOTE
Separate channel numbers with a comma or dash (no spaces) if using more than one channel
number (e.g., 247,585,742 or 385-395 for numbers through and including).
. . . continued on next page
3-88
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
RFDS Set-up and Calibration
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-46: RFDS Calibration Procedure
 Step
Action
Select the appropriate carrier(s) in the Carriers pick list.
NOTE
Use the  or  key to select multiple carriers.
Select the appropriate Rx branch (Main, Diversity or Both) in the RX Branch pick list.
10
Click OK.
A status report window is displayed, followed by a Directions pop-up window.
11
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
A status report window displays the results of the actions.
12
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
13
Click on the MGLI.
14
Download updated RFDS offset data to the selected GLI device by clicking on
Device>Download>Data from the tab menu bar and pull-down menu.
Program TSU NAM
Follow the procedure in Table 3-47 to program the TSU NAM. The
NAM must be programmed before it can receive and process test calls,
or be used for any type of RFDS test.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
 MGLI is INS.
 TSU is powered up and has a code load.
Table 3-47: Program the TSU NAM
Step
Action
Select the RFDS tab.
Select the SUA (Cobra RFDS) or TSU (GLI based RFDS).
Click on the TSU menu.
Click on the Program TSU NAM menu item.
Enter the appropriate information in the boxes (see Table 3-42 and Table 3-43).
Click on the OK button to display the status report.
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-89
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
68P09255A61-4
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
Objective
This section tests the redundancy options that could be included in the
cell site. These tests verify, under a fault condition, that all modules
equipped with redundancy switch operations to their redundant partner
and resume operation. An example would be to pull the currently active
CSM and verify the standby CSM takes over distribution of the CDMA
reference signal.
Redundancy covers many BTS modules. Confirm the redundant options
included in the BTS, and proceed as required. If the BTS has only basic
power supply redundancy, the tests and procedures detailed in the
following tables should be bypassed.
Table 3-50. Miscellaneous Alarm Tests (BTS Frame)
Table 3-51. BBX Redundancy Tests (BTS Frame)
Table 3-52. CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO Redundancy Alarm Tests
Table 3-53. LPA Redundancy Test
 Table 3-54. MGLI/GLI Redundancy Test
During redundancy verification of the test, alarms reported by the master
GLI (displayed via the alarm monitor) will also be verified/noted.
Test Equipment
The following pieces of test equipment are required to perform this test:
 LMF
 Communications Test Set
Redundancy/Alarm Test
Perform each of the following tests to verify BTS redundancy and to
confirm all alarms are received and reported by the BTS equipment. The
procedures should be performed on the following modules/boards:
3-90
Power supply/converter modules in all frames
Distribution shelf modules in the BTS frame
C-CCP shelf modules in the BTS frame (except MCCs)
LPA modules in the BTS frame
AMR Customer defined input/output tests
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
68P09255A61-4
Test Equipment Setup
Follow the procedure in Table 3-48 to set up test equipment:
NOTE
All alarm tests are performed using TX antenna 1
Table 3-48: Test Equipment Setup for Redundancy/Alarm Tests
Step
Action
Interface the LMF computer to the BTS LAN A connector on the BTS frame (refer to Table 3-2,
page 3-6).
Login to the BTS.
Set up test equipment for TX Calibration at TXOUT1 (see Figure 3-12).
NOTE
If site is not equipped for redundancy, remove all GLI and BBX boards installed in any redundant
slot positions at this time.
Display the alarm monitor by selecting Util>Alarm Monitor.
Unequip all customer defined AMR alarms reported via the AMR Alarm connector (A & B) by
clicking on MGLI, then selecting Device>Set Alarm Relays>Unequipped.
NOTE
During configuration of MGLI alarm reporting, spurious alarms may report. Allow the BTS to
stabilize for 10 seconds. If any alarms are actively being reported after the BTS has stabilized,
determine the cause before proceeding further.
Power Supply Redundancy
Follow the steps in Table 3-49 to verify redundancy of the power supply
modules. Alarms reported by the master GLI (displayed via the alarm
monitor) are also verified.
Table 3-49: Power Supply/Converter Redundancy (BTS Frame)
Step
Action
Select the MGLI (highlight) and from the pulldown menu select:
Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Redundant Sector>Carrier-#-1-1
Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Pilot Only>Carrier-#-1-1
Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Pilot Gain>Carrier-#-1-1 and Pilot Gain = 262
Select (highlight) BBX-1 and from the pulldown menu select Device>BBX/MAWI>Key.
Set XCVR gain to 40 and enter the correct XCVR channel number.
Remove PS-1 from the power distribution shelf (see Figure 3-22).
- Observe that an alarm message is reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.
- Verify no other modules went OOS.
Re-install PS-1.
Observe the alarm clears on the alarm monitor.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 for PS-2 and PS-3.
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-91
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-49: Power Supply/Converter Redundancy (BTS Frame)
Step
Action
NOTE
For +27 V systems, skip to step 7 through step 10.
On -48 V systems, remove PS-4 (see Figure 3-23).
- Observe that an alarm message is reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.
- Verify no other modules went OOS.
Re-install PS-4.
Observe the alarm clears on the alarm monitor.
Repeat steps 7 and 8 for PS-5 through PS-9.
10
Verify that all PWR/ALM LEDs are GREEN.
11
Select BBX-1 and Device>BBX/MAWI>Dekey
MPC/EMPC-1
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Á
Á
Á
Á Á
MPC/EMPC-2
Switch
BBX-12
BBX-1 1
BBX-10
BBX-9
BBX-8
BBX-7
MCC-12
MCC-1 1
MCC-10
MCC-9
MCC-8
MCC-7
GLI2-2
AMR-2
38 mm Filler Panel
CCD-2
CSM-2
CSM-1
HSO/LFR
CCD-1
CIO
BBX-6
BBX-R
BBX-5
BBX-4
BBX-3
BBX-2
BBX2-1
MCC-6
MCC-5
MCC-4
MCC-3
MCC-2
GLI2-1
MCC-1
AMR-1
PS-3
PS-2
PS-1
19 mm Filler Panel
Figure 3-22: SC 4812T C-CCP Shelf
NOTE: MCCs may be
MCC8Es, MCC24s, or
MCC-1Xs. BBXs may
be BBX2s or BBX-1Xs.
GLIs may be GLI2s or
GLI3s.
FW00295
3-92
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
68P09255A61-4
Figure 3-23: -48 V BTS Power Conversion Shelf
FAN
MODULE
REAR
FAN
MODULE
REAR
FRONT
PWR/ALM
1A 30
1B
1C 30
1D
PWR/ALM
FRONT
2A 30
30
2B
2D
30
3B
3C 30
3D
4A 30
4B
4C 30
4D
PS-9
PS-8
PS-7
PS-6
PS-5
PS-4
AMR
L 2C
A 3A
FW00501
Miscellaneous Alarm/Redundancy Tests
Follow the steps in Table 3-50 to verify alarms reported by the master
GLI are displayed via the alarm monitor if a BTS frame module failure
occurs.
Table 3-50: Miscellaneous Alarm Tests
Step
Action
Select Util>Alarm Monitor to display the alarm monitor window.
Perform the following to verify fan module alarms:
• Unseat a fan module (see Figure 3-24 or Figure 3-25).
• Observe an alarm message was reported via the MGLI (as displayed on the alarm monitor).
• Replace fan module and verify the alarm monitor reports that the alarm clears.
• Repeat for all other fan modules in the BTS frame.
NOTE
Follow Step 3 for Starter Frames and Step 4 for Expansion Frames.
Starter Frames Only:
Perform the following to verify MPC module alarms.
• Unseat MPC modules (see Figure 3-22) one at a time.
• Observe that an alarm message was reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.
• Replace the MPC modules and verify the alarm monitor reports the alarm clears.
Expansion Frames Only:
Perform the following to verify EMPC module alarms.
• Unseat EMPC modules (see Figure 3-22) one at a time
• Observe that an alarm message was reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.
• Replace the EMPC modules and verify the alarm monitor reports that the alarm clears.
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-93
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-50: Miscellaneous Alarm Tests
Step
Action
If equipped with AMR redundancy, perform the following to verify AMR module redundancy/alarms.
• Unseat AMR 2 (see Figure 3-22).
• Observe that an alarm message is reported via the MGLI (as displayed on the alarm monitor).
• Repeat Steps 1 through 3 and/or 4.
• Replace the AMR module and verify the alarm monitor reports that the alarm clears.
• Unseat AMR 1 and observe an alarm message was reported via the MGLI (as displayed on the alarm
monitor).
• Replace the AMR module and verify the LMF reports the alarm has cleared.
NOTE
All PWR/ALM LEDs should be GREEN at the completion of this test.
Figure 3-24: +27 V BTS C-CCP Fan Modules
LATCHES
FAN
MODULE
REAR
FAN
MODULE
REAR
PWR/ALM
FRONT
FAN
MODULE
REAR
PWR/ALM
FRONT
PWR/ALM
FRONT
FAN MODULES
FW00130
3-94
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
68P09255A61-4
Figure 3-25: -48 V BTS C-CCP and Power Conversion Shelf Fan Modules
LATCHES
FAN
MODULE
REAR
FAN
MODULE
REAR
PWR/ALM
FRONT
FRONT
FAN
MODULE
REAR
PWR/ALM
PWR/ALM
FRONT
FAN MODULES
LATCHES
FAN
MODULE
REAR
FRONT
FAN
MODULE
REAR
PWR/ALM
PWR/ALM
FRONT
FW00489
FAN MODULES
BBX Redundancy
Follow the steps in Table 3-51 to verify redundancy of the BBXs in the
C-CCP shelf. Alarms reported by the master GLI (displayed via the
alarm monitor) are also verified. This test can be repeated for additional
sectors at the customer’s discretion.
Table 3-51: BBX Redundancy Alarms
Step
Action
n WARNING
Any BBXs enabled will immediately key-up. Before enabling any BBX, always verify that the TX
output assigned to the BBX is terminated into a 50 W non-radiating RF load! Failure to do so could
result in serious personal injury and/or damage to the equipment.
Enable the primary, then the redundant BBX assigned to ANT 1 by selecting the BBX and
Device>BBX/MAWI>Key.
Observe that primary BBXs key up, and a carrier is present at each respective frequency.
Remove the primary BBX.
Observe a carrier is still present.
The Redundant BBX is now the active BBX for Antenna 1.
Replace the primary BBX and reload the BBX with code and data.
Re-enable the primary BBX assigned to ANT 1 and observe that a carrier is present at each respective
frequency.
Remove the redundant BBX and observe a carrier is still present.
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-95
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-51: BBX Redundancy Alarms
Step
Action
The Primary BBX is now the active BBX for ANT 1.
Replace the redundant BBX and reload the BBX with code and data.
10
Re-enable the redundant BBX assigned to ANT 1 and observe that a carrier is present at each
respective frequency:
11
De-key the Xcvr by selecting Device>BBX/MAWI>Dekey.
12
Repeat Steps 1 through 11 for additional BBXs/antennas, if equipped.
CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO Redundancy/Alarm Tests
Follow the procedure in Table 3-52 to verify the manual redundancy of
the CSM, GPS, and LFR/HSO boards. Verification of alarms reported is
also covered.
NOTE
DO NOT perform the procedure in Table 3-52, unless the site is
configured with a LORAN-C or HSO timebase as a backup for
the GPS.
Table 3-52: CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO, Redundancy/Alarm Tests
Step
Action
n WARNING
Any BBXs enabled will immediately key-up. Before enabling any BBX, always verify that the TX
output assigned to the BBX is terminated into a 50 W non-radiating RF load! Failure to do so could
result in serious personal injury and/or damage to the equipment.
Enable the primary, then the redundant BBXs assigned to ANT 1 by selecting the BBX and
Device>BBX/MAWI>Key.
Disconnect the GPS antenna cable, located on top of the BTS frame (see Figure 3-26).
This forces the LORAN-C LFR or HSO board timebase to become the CDMA timing source.
Observe a CDMA timing reference alarm and source change is reported by the alarm monitor.
Allow the LFR/HSO to become the active timing source.
 Verify the BBXs remain keyed and INS.
 Verify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer to LFR/HSO reference.
 Observe the PWR/ALM LEDs on the CSM 1 front panel are steady GREEN.
Reconnect the GPS antenna cable.
Allow the GPS to become the active timing source.
 Verify the BBXs remain keyed and INS.
 Verify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer back to the GPS reference.
 Observe the PWR/ALM LEDs on CSM 1 are steady GREEN.
. . . continued on next page
3-96
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-52: CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO, Redundancy/Alarm Tests
Step
Action
Disable CSM 1 and enable CSM 2.
 Various CSM source and clock alarms are now reported and the site comes down.
 Alarms clear when the site comes back up.
Allow the CSM 2 board to go INS_ACT.
 Verify the BBXs are dekeyed and OOS, and the MCCs are OOS_RAM.
 Verify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer to CSM 2 reference.
 Observe the PWR/ALM LEDs on CSM 2 front panels are steady GREEN.
NOTE
It can take up to 20 minutes for the CSM to re-establish the GPS link and go INS. MCCs go
OOS_RAM.
Key BBXs 1 and R and observe a carrier is present.
10
Repeat Steps 2 through 6 to verify CSM source redundancy with CSM 2.
* IMPORTANT
DO NOT ENABLE the redundant CSM.
11
Disable CSM 2 and enable CSM 1.
 Various CSM Source and Clock alarms are reported and the site comes down.
 Alarms clear when the site comes back up.
12
De-key the Xcvr by selecting Device>BBX/MAWI>Dekey.
13
Allow the CSM 1 board to go INS_ACT.
 Verify the BBXs are de-keyed and OOS.
 Verify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer to CSM 1 reference.
 Observe PWR/ALM LEDs on the CSM 1 front panels are steady GREEN.
14
Aug 2002
Disable the primary and redundant BBXs.
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-97
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
68P09255A61-4
Figure 3-26: +27 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate
REAR
SPAN I/O A
SITE I/O
SPAN I/O B
LFR/
HSO
2B
GND
RX
3A
3B
4A
4B
5A
5B
6A
6B
LIVE TERMINALS
SPAN I/O A
2A
1B
+27 VDC
RGD
RGPS
1A
LIVE TERMINALS
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ALARM A
TX OUT
SPAN I/O B
ALARM B
CAUTION
EXP I/O
GPS
LAN
OUT
LAN
IN
REF FW00215
FRONT
GPS IN
3-98
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
68P09255A61-4
LPA Redundancy Test
Follow the procedure in Table 3-53 to verify redundancy of the LPAs.
WARNING
First verify there are no BBX channels keyed BEFORE
moving the antenna connection. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.
Table 3-53: LPA Redundancy Test
Step
Action
From the pulldown menu select:
Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Redundant Sector>Carrier-#-1-1
Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Pilot Only>Carrier-#-1-1
Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Pilot Gain> Carrier-#-1-1 and Pilot Gain = 262
Key-up the BBX assigned to the LPAs associated with the sector under test (gain = 40).
Adjust the communications test set spectrum analyzer, as required, to observe the overall carrier
amplitude and IM Shelf and note for reference. These figures will be required later.
NOTE
See Figure 3-14 for test equipment setup, if required.
Push-in and release the breaker supplying the 1st LPA of the pair.
NOTE
After power is removed, IM suppression takes a few seconds to settle out while compensating for the
removal of the 1st LPA. The overall gain decreases by approximately 6 dB. The process must be
complete before proceeding.
Verify:
• The other LPA module did not go OOS due to the loss of the LPA.
• The overall carrier amplitude is reduced by approximately 6 dB and IM suppression on the analyzer
display remains basically unchanged.
• LPA fault message is reported via the MGLI and displayed on the alarm monitor.
Re-apply power to the LPA module and observe the alarm has cleared on the alarm monitor.
NOTE
All PWR/ALM LEDs should be GREEN at completion of test.
Repeat Steps 4 through 6 to verify the 2nd LPA of the pair.
De-key the BBX.
n WARNING
First verify there are no BBX channels keyed when moving the antenna connection. Failure to do so
can result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.
Aug 2002
Repeat Steps 1 through 8 to verify LPAs assigned to sectors 2 and 3 (if equipped). Move the test cable
on top of the BTS to TX OUT 2 and TX OUT 3 antenna connectors as required.
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-99
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
68P09255A61-4
MGLI/GLI Redundancy Test
CAUTION
This test can only be performed when the MM path is established
by the MM (not just with LAPD link connected). Attempting to
force the GLIs to “hot swap” under alarm monitor control, when
isolated from the MM, causes MGLIs to hang up.
Table 3-54: MGLI/GLI Redundancy Test (with MM Connection Established)
Step
Action
NOTE
 This test assumes the alarm monitor is NOT connected to the BTS and the T1/E1 span is connected
and communication is established with the MM.
 BOTH GLIs must be INS before continuing.
Verify the BBXs are enabled and a CDMA carrier is present.
Identify the primary and redundant MGLI pairs.
Pull the MGLI that is currently INS-ACT and has cage control.
Observe the BBX remains GREEN, and the redundant MGLI is now active.
Verify no other modules go OOS due to the transfer of control to the redundant module.
Verify that the BBXs are enabled and a CDMA carrier is present.
Reinstall the MGLI and have the OMCR/CBSC place it back in-service.
Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to verify the other MGLI/GLI board.
3-100
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
BTS Alarms Testing
68P09255A61-4
BTS Alarms Testing
Alarm Test Overview
ALARM connectors provide Customer Defined Alarm Inputs and
Outputs. The customer can connect BTS site alarm input sensors and
output devices to the BTS, thus providing alarm reporting of active
sensors as well controlling output devices.
The SC 4812T is capable of concurrently monitoring 36 input signals
coming into the BTS. These inputs are divided between 2 Alarm
connectors marked ‘ALARM A’ and ‘ALARM B’ located at the top of
the frame (see Figure 3-27). The ALARM A connector is always
functional; ALARM B is functional when an AMR module is equipped
in the AMR 2 slot in the distribution shelf. ALARM A port monitors
input numbers 1 through 18, while ALARM B port monitors input
numbers 19 through 36 (see Figure 3-28). State transitions on these input
lines are reported to the LMF and OMCR as MGLI Input Relay alarms.
ALARM A and ALARM B connectors each provide 18 inputs and 8
outputs. If both A and B are functional, 36 inputs and 16 outputs are
available. They may be configured as redundant. The configuration is set
by the CBSC.
Alarm Reporting Display
The Alarm Monitor window can be displayed to list alarms that occur
after the window is displayed. To access the Alarm Monitor window,
select Util>Alarm Monitor.
The following buttons are included:
 The Options button allows for a severity level (Warning, Minor, and
Major) selection. The default is all levels. To change the level of
alarms reported click on the Options button and highlight the desired
alarm level(s). To select multiple levels press the  key (for
individual selections) or  key (for a range of selections) while
clicking on the desired levels.
 The Pause button pauses/stops the display of alarms. When the Pause
button is clicked the name of the button changes to Continue. When
the Continue button is clicked, the display of alarms continues.
Alarms that occur between the time the Pause button is clicked and
the Continue button is clicked are not displayed.
 The Clear button clears the Alarm Monitor display. New alarms that
occur after the Clear button is clicked are displayed.
 The Dismiss button dismisses/closes the Alarm Monitor display.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-101
BTS Alarms Testing
68P09255A61-4
Figure 3-27: Alarm Connector Location and Connector Pin Numbering
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Á
ÁÁ
Á
Á Á
59
59
60
60
FW00301
Purpose
The following procedures verify the customer defined alarms and relay
contacts are functioning properly. These tests are performed on all AMR
alarms/relays in a sequential manner until all have been verified. Perform
these procedures periodically to ensure the external alarms are reported
properly. Following these procedures ensures continued peak system
performance.
Study the site engineering documents and perform the following tests
only after first verifying that the AMR cabling configuration required to
interconnect the BTS frame with external alarm sensors and/or relays
meet requirements called out in the SC 4812T Series BTS Installation
Manual.
NOTE
Motorola highly recommends that you read and understand this
procedure in its entirety before starting this procedure.
Test Equipment
The following test equipment is required to perform these tests:
 LMF
 Alarms Test Box (CGDSCMIS00014) -optional
NOTE
Abbreviations used in the following figures and tables are
defined as:
 NC = normally closed
 NO = normally open
 COM or C = common
 CDO = Customer Defined (Relay) Output
 CDI = Customer Defined (Alarm) Input
3-102
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
BTS Alarms Testing
68P09255A61-4
Figure 3-28: AMR Connector Pin Numbering
A CDI 18
...
A CDI 1
Returns
60
26
60
26
59
25
59
25
ALARM A
(AMR 1)
Returns
ALARM B
(AMR 2)
B CDI 36
...
B CDI 19
FW00302
NOTE
The preferred method to verify alarms is to follow the Alarms
Test Box Procedure, Table 3-55. If not using an Alarm Test Box,
follow the procedure listed in Table 3-56.
CDI Alarm Input Verification with Alarms Test Box
Table 3-55 describes how to test the CDI alarm input verification using
the Alarm Test Box. Follow the steps as instructed and compare results
with the LMF display.
NOTE
It may take a few seconds for alarms to be reported. The default
delay is 5 seconds. Leave the alarms test box switches in the new
position until the alarms have been reported.
Table 3-55: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test Box
Step
Action
Connect the LMF to the BTS and log into the BTS.
Select the MGLI.
Click on the Device menu.
Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.
Click on Normally Open.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.
Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector (see Figure 3-27).
Set all of the switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position. An alarm should be reported for
each switch setting.
10
Set all of the switches on the alarms test box to the Open position. A clear alarm should be reported
for each switch setting.
11
Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.
12
Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.
13
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position. An alarm should be reported for each
switch setting
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-103
BTS Alarms Testing
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-55: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test Box
Step
Action
14
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position. A clear alarm should be reported for each
switch setting.
15
Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.
16
Select the MGLI.
17
Click on the Device menu.
18
Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.
19
Click on Normally Closed. A status report window displays the results of the action.
20
Click OK to close the status report window.
Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 36.
21
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.
22
Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector.
Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 18.
23
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.
An alarm should be reported for each switch setting.
24
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.
A clear alarm should be reported for each switch setting.
25
Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.
26
Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.
A clear alarm should be reported for alarm inputs 19 through 36.
27
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.
An alarm should be reported for each switch setting.
28
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.
A clear alarm should be reported for each switch setting.
29
Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.
30
Select the MGLI.
31
Click on the Device menu.
32
Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.
33
Click on Unequipped.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
34
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
35
Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector.
36
Set all switches on the alarms test box to both the Open and the Closed position.
No alarm should be reported for any switch settings.
. . . continued on next page
3-104
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
BTS Alarms Testing
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-55: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test Box
Step
Action
37
Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.
38
Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.
39
Set all switches on the alarms test box to both the Open and the Closed position.
No alarm should be reported for any switch settings.
40
Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.
41
Load data to the MGLI to reset the alarm relay conditions according to the CDF file.
CDI Alarm Input Verification without Alarms Test Box
Table 3-56 describes how to test the CDI alarm input verification
without the use of the Alarms Test Box. Follow the steps as instructed
and compare results with the LMF display.
NOTE
It may take a few seconds for alarms to be reported. The default
delay is 5 seconds. When shorting alarm pins wait for the alarm
report before removing the short.
Table 3-56: CDI Alarm Input Verification Without the Alarms Test Box
Step
Action
Connect the LMF to the BTS and log into the BTS.
Select the MGLI.
Click on the Device menu.
Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.
Click on Normally Open.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
Click on OK to close the status report window.
Refer to Figure 3-28 and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins
(25-26 through 59-60) together.
An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.
A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.
Refer to Figure 3-28 and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins
(25-26 through 59-60) together.
An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.
A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.
Select the MGLI.
10
Click on the Device menu.
11
Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-105
BTS Alarms Testing
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-56: CDI Alarm Input Verification Without the Alarms Test Box
Step
Action
12
Click on Normally Closed.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
13
Click on OK to close the status report window.
Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 36.
14
Refer to Figure 3-28 and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins
(25-26 through 59-60) together.
A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.
An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.
15
Refer to Figure 3-28 and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins
(25-26 through 59-60) together.
A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.
An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.
16
Select the MGLI.
17
Click on the Device menu.
18
Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.
19
Click on Unequipped.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
20
Click on OK to close the status report window.
21
Refer to Figure 3-28 and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins
(25-26 through 59-60) together.
No alarms should be displayed.
22
Refer to Figure 3-28 and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins
(25-26 through 59-60) together.
No alarms should be displayed.
23
Load data to the MGLI to reset the alarm relay conditions according to the CDF file.
Pin and Signal Information for Alarm Connectors
Table 3-57 lists the pins and signal names for Alarms A and B.
Table 3-57: Pin and Signal Information for Alarm Connectors
ALARM A
Pin
ALARM B
Signal Name
Pin
Signal Name
Pin
Signal Name
Pin
Signal Name
A CDO1 NC
31
Cust Retn 4
B CDO9 NC
31
B CDI 22
A CDO1 Com
32
A CDI 4
B CDO9 Com
32
Cust Retn 22
A CDO1 NO
33
Cust Retn 5
B CDO9 NO
33
B CDI 23
A CDO2 NC
34
A CDI 5
B CDO10 NC
34
Cust Retn 23
. . . continued on next page
3-106
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
BTS Alarms Testing
68P09255A61-4
Table 3-57: Pin and Signal Information for Alarm Connectors
ALARM A
ALARM B
Pin
Signal Name
Pin
Signal Name
Pin
Signal Name
Pin
Signal Name
A CDO2 Com
35
Cust Retn 6
B CDO10 Com
35
B CDI 24
A CDO2 NO
36
A CDI 6
B CDO10 NO
36
Cust Retn 24
A CDO3 NC
37
Cust Retn 7
B CDO11 NC
37
B CDI 25
A CDO3 Com
38
A CDI 7
B CDO11 Com
38
Cust Retn 25
A CDO3 NO
39
Cust Retn 8
B CDO11 NO
39
B CDI 26
10
A CDO4 NC
40
A CDI 8
10
B CDO12 NC
40
Cust Retn 26
11
A CDO4 Com
41
Cust Retn 9
11
B CDO12 Com
41
B CDI 27
12
A CDO4 NO
42
A CDI 9
12
B CDO12 NO
42
Cust Retn 27
13
A CDO5 NC
43
Cust Retn 10
13
B CDO13 NC
43
B CDI 28
14
A CDO5 Com
44
A CDI 10
14
B CDO13 Com
44
Cust Retn 28
15
A CDO5 NO
45
Cust Retn 11
15
B CDO13 NO
45
B CDI 29
16
A CDO6 NC
46
A CDI 11
16
B CDO14 NC
46
Cust Retn 29
17
A CDO6 Com
47
Cust Retn 12
17
B CDO14 Com
47
B CDI 30
18
A CDO6 NO
48
A CDI 12
18
B CDO14 NO
48
Cust Retn 30
19
A CDO7 NC
49
Cust Retn 13
19
B CDO15 NC
49
B CDI 31
20
A CDO7 Com
50
A CDI 13
20
B CDO15 Com
50
Cust Retn 31
21
A CDO7 NO
51
Cust Retn 14
21
B CDO15 NO
51
B CDI 32
22
A CDO8 NC
52
A CDI 14
22
B CDO16 NC
52
Cust Retn 32
23
A CDO8 Com
53
Cust Retn 15
23
B CDO16 Com
53
B CDI 33
24
A CDO8 NO
54
A CDI 15
24
B CDO16 NO
54
Cust Retn 33
25
Cust Retn 1
55
Cust Retn 16
25
B CDI 19
55
B CDI 34
26
A CDI 1
56
A CDI 16
26
Cust Retn 19
56
Cust Retn 34
27
Cust Retn 2
57
Cust Retn 17
27
B CDI 20
57
B CDI 35
28
A CDI 2
58
A CDI 17
28
Cust Retn 20
58
Cust Retn 35
29
Cust Retn 3
59
Cust Retn 18
29
B CDI 21 (+27 V)
59
B CDI 36
60
Cust Retn 36
Converter Alarm (-48 V)
30
A CDI 3
60
A CDI 18
30
Cust Retn 21 (+27 V)
Converter Retn (-48V)
NOTE
CDO = Customer Defined Output
CDI = Customer Defined Input
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
3-107
BTS Alarms Testing
68P09255A61-4
Notes
3-108
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Chapter 4
Automated Acceptance Test
Procedure
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
4-1
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures - All-inclusive TX & RX
68P09255A61-4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures - All-inclusive TX & RX
Introduction
The Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) allows Cellular Field
Engineers (CFEs) to run automated acceptance tests on all equipped BTS
subsystem devices using the Local Maintenance Facility (LMF) and
supported test equipment per the current Cell Site Data File (CDF)
assignment.
The results of these tests (at the option of the operator) are written to a
file that can be printed. All tests are controlled from the LMF platform
using the GPIB interface, therefore, only recommended test equipment
supported by the LMF can be used.
This chapter describes the tests run from the GUI environment, which is
the recommended method. The GUI provides the advantages of
simplifying the LMF user interface, reducing the potential for miskeying
commmands and associated parameters, and speeding up the execution
of complex operations involving multiple command strings. If you feel
the command line interface (CLI) will provide additional insight into the
progress of ATPs and problems that could possibly be encountered, refer
to LMF CLI Commands.
CAUTION
Before performing any tests, use an editor to view the
“CAVEATS” section of the “readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmf
folder for any applicable information.
The ATP test is to be performed on out-of-service (OOS) sectors
only.
DO NOT substitute test equipment not supported by the LMF.
NOTE
4-2
Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed information on test set
connections for calibrating equipment, cables and other test set
components, if required.
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
68P09255A61-4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures - All-inclusive TX & RX
Reduced ATP
NOTE
Equipment has been factory-tested for FCC compliance. If
license-governing bodies require documentation supporting
SITE compliance with regulations, a full ATP may be necessary.
Perform the Reduced ATP only if reports for the specific BTS
site are NOT required.
After downloading the proper operational software to the BTS, the CFE
must perform these procedures (minimal recommendation):
1. Verify the TX/RX paths by performing TX Calibration, TX Audit
and FER tests.
2. Retrieve Calibration Data required for normal site operation.
Should failures occur while performing the specified tests, refer to the
Basic Troubleshooting section of this manual for help in determining the
failure point. Once the point of failure has been identified and corrected,
refer to the BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix section
(Appendix C) to determine the applicable test that must be performed.
In the unlikely event that the BTS passes these tests but has a forward
link problem during normal operation, the CFE should then perform the
additional TX tests for troubleshooting: TX spectral mask, TX rho, and
TX code domain.
Required Test Equipment
The following test equipment is required:
WARNING
NOTE
Aug 2002
LMF
Power meter (used with HP8921A/600 and Advantest R3465)
Communications system analyzer
Signal generator for FER testing (required for all communications
system analyzers for 1X FER)
- Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTS
TX OUT connector, verify that there are no CDMA
channels keyed.
- At active sites, have the OMCR/CBSC place the carrier
assigned to the LPAs under test OOS. Failure to do so can
result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.
The test equipment must be re-calibrated before using it to
perform the TX Acceptance Tests.
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
4-3
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures - All-inclusive TX & RX
68P09255A61-4
ATP Test Prerequisites
Before attempting to run any ATP tests, ensure the following have been
completed:
 BTS has been optimized and calibrated (see Chapter 3).
 LMF is logged into the BTS.
 CSMs, GLIs, BBXs, MCCs, and TSU (if the RFDS is installed) have
correct code load and data load.
 Primary CSM, GLI, and MCCs are INS_ACT (bright green).
 BBXs are calibrated and BLOs are downloaded.
 No BBXs are keyed (transmitting).
 BBXs are OOS_RAM (yellow).
 Test cables are calibrated.
 Test equipment is connected for ATP tests (see Figure 3-14 through
Figure 3-18 starting on page 3-52).
 Test equipment has been warmed up 60 minutes and calibrated.
 GPIB is on.
 BTS transmit connectors are properly terminated for the test(s) to be
performed.
WARNING
Before performing the FER, be sure that all LPAs are turned
OFF (circuit breakers pulled) or that all transmitter ports are
properly terminated.
All transmit ports must be properly terminated for all ATP tests.
Failure to observe these warnings may result in bodily injury or
equipment damage.
TX OUT Connection
NOTE
Many of the acceptance test procedures require taking
measurements at the TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector. At sites
without RFDS installed, all measurements will be via the BTS
TX OUT connector. At sites with RFDS installed, all
measurements will be via the RFDS directional coupler TX
OUT connector.
ATP Tests
The tests can be run individually or as one of the following groups:
 All TX/RX: Executes all the TX and RX tests.
 All TX: TX tests verify the performance of the BTS transmit line up.
These include the GLI, MCC, BBX, and CIO cards, the LPAs and
passive components including splitters, combiners, bandpass filters,
and RF cables.
4-4
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
68P09255A61-4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures - All-inclusive TX & RX
 All RX: RX tests verify the performance of the BTS receiver line up.
These include the MPC (for starter frames), EMPC (for expansion
frames), CIO, BBX, MCC, and GLI cards and the passive components
including RX filters (starter frame only), and RF cables.
 Full Optimization: Executes the TX calibration, downloads the BLO,
and executes the TX audit before running all of the TX and RX tests.
NOTE
The Full Optimization test can be run if you want the TX path
calibrated before all the TX and RX tests are run.
If manual testing has been performed with the HP analyzer,
remove the manual control/system memory card from the card
slot and set the I/O Config to the Talk & Lstn mode before
starting the automated testing.
Follow the procedure in Table 4-1 to perform any ATP test.
NOTE
The STOP button can be used to stop the testing process.
Table 4-1: ATP Test Procedure
 Step
Action
Ensure that all pre-requisites have been met.
NOTE
If the LMF has been logged into the BTS with a different Multi-Channel Preselector setting than
the one to be used for this test, the LMF must be logged out of the BTS and logged in again with
the new Multi-Channel Preselector setting. Using the wrong MPC setting can cause a false test
failure.
AUTHOR NOTE:
Is this step necessary for the T and ET? As it stands now,
the additional test equipment set−up table is not in the T
and ET books.
If a companion frame is being tested and either BOTH or DIV is to be selected in step 8, perform
the additional test equipment set-up in Table ??? for the diversity RX portion of the ATP.
Select the device(s) to be tested.
From the Tests menu, select the test you want to run.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier
pick list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the  or  key while making the selections.
Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
The default channel number displayed is determined by the CdmaChans[n] number in the
cbsc-n.cdf file for the BTS.
NOTE
Single-sided BLO is only used when checking non-redundant transceivers.
If applicable, select Verify BLO (default) or Single-sided BLO.
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
4-5
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures - All-inclusive TX & RX
68P09255A61-4
Table 4-1: ATP Test Procedure
 Step
Action
NOTE
If a companion frame with the inter-frame diversity RX cabling disconnected is being tested do
not select BOTH in step 8. The RX main and diversity paths must be tested separately for this
configuration because each requires a different Multi-Coupler Preselector type to provide the
proper test signal gain.
Select the appropriate RX branch (BOTH, MAIN, or DIVersity) in the drop-down list.
NOTE
The Rate Set selection of 1 is only available if non-1X cards are selected for the test.
The Rate Set selection of 2 is only available if non-1X cards are selected for the test.
The Rate Set selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.
10
In the Rate Set box, select the appropriate data rate (1=9600, 2=14400, 3=9600 1X) from the
drop-down list.
Enter the channel elements to be tested for the RX ATP in the Channel Element(s) box. By
default, all channel elements are specified.
Use one of thefollowing methods to enter more than one channel element:
- Enter non-sequential channel elements separated by a comma and no spaces (for example;
0,5,15).
- Enter a range of sequential channel elements by typing the first and last channel elements
separated by two periods (for example; 0..15).
NOTE
11
The channel element numbers are 0 based; that is the first channel element is 0.
If applicable, select a test pattern from the Test Pattern pick list.
NOTE
 Selecting Pilot (default) performs tests using only a pilot signal.
 Selecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and 6 traffic channels. This
requires an MCC to be selected.
 Selecting CDFPilot performs tests using only a pilot signal, however, the gain for the channel
elements is specified in the CDF file.
 Selecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and 6 traffic channels, however, the
gain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.
12
13
Click on the OK button.
The status report window and a Directions pop-up are displayed.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue button to
begin testing.
The test results are displayed in the status report window.
14
Click on Save Results or Dismiss.
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
4-6
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
TX Output Acceptance Tests: Introduction
68P09255A61-4
TX Output Acceptance Tests: Introduction
Individual Acceptance Tests
The following individual tests can be used to verify the results of
specific tests.
Spectral Purity TX Mask (Primary & Redundant BBX)
This test verifies that the transmitted CDMA carrier waveform generated
on each sector meets the transmit spectral mask specification with
respect to the assigned CDF file values.
Waveform Quality (rho)
This test verifies that the transmitted Pilot channel element digital
waveform quality (rho) exceeds the minimum specified value in
ANSI-J_STD-019. “Rho” represents the correlation between actual and
perfect CDMA modulation spectrum. A rho value of 1.0000 represents
100% (or perfect correlation).
Pilot Time Offset
The Pilot Time Offset is the difference between the CDMA analyzer
measurement interval (based on the BTS system time reference) and the
incoming block of transmitted data from the BTS (Pilot only, Pilot
Gain = 262, PN Offset = 0).
Code Domain Power (Primary & Redundant BBX)
This test verifies the code domain power levels, which have been set for
all ODD numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This is
done by verifying that the ratio of PILOT divided by OCNS is equal to
10.2 + 2 dB, and, that the noise floor of all EVEN numbered “OFF”
Walsh channels measures < -27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channel
power).
Frame Error Rate
The Frame Error Rate (FER) test verifies RX operation of the entire
CDMA Reverse Link using all equipped MCCs assigned to all
respective sectors/antennas. This test verifies the BTS sensitivity on all
traffic channel elements currently configured on all equipped MCCs at
an RF input level of -119 dBm (or -116 dBm if using TMPC).
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
4-7
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test
68P09255A61-4
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test
Tx Mask Test
This test verifies the spectral purity of each BBX carrier keyed up at a
specific frequency, per the current CDF file assignment. All tests are
performed using the external calibrated test set, controlled by the same
command. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT
(BTS/RFDS) connector.
The Pilot Gain is set to 541 for each antenna, and all channel elements
from the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX is keyed up, using
both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot
channel element only). BBX power output is set to obtain +40 dBm as
measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDS
directional coupler).
NOTE
TX output power is set to +40 dBm by setting BTS power level
to +33.5 dBm to compensate for 6.5 dB increase from pilot gain
set to 541.
The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the
attenuation level of all spurious and IM products in a 30 kHz resolution
bandwidth. With respect to the mean power of the CDMA channel
measured in a 1.23 MHz bandwidth in dB, verify that results meet
system tolerances at the following test points:
 1.7/1.9 GHz:
- at least -45 dB @ + 900 kHz from center frequency
- at least -45 dB @ - 900 kHz from center frequency
 800 MHz:
at least -45
at least -45
at least -60
at least -60
dB @ + 750 kHz from center frequency
dB @ - 750 kHz from center frequency
dB @ - 1980 kHz from center frequency
dB @ - 1980 kHz from center frequency
The BBX then de-keys, and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to
assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna path
under test. The test is then repeated.
See Table 4-1 to perform this test.
4-8
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test
68P09255A61-4
Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display
Mean CDMA Bandwidth
Power Reference
.5 MHz Span/Div
Ampl 10 dB/Div
Center Frequency
Reference
Attenuation level of all
spurious and IM products
with respect to the mean
power of the CDMA channel
+ 1980 kHz
- 1980 kHz
- 900 kHz
- 750 kHz
Aug 2002
+ 900 kHz
+750 kHz
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
FW00282
4-9
TX Waveform Quality (rho) Acceptance Test
68P09255A61-4
TX Waveform Quality (rho) Acceptance Test
Rho Test
This test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element digital waveform
quality of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the
current CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the external
calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements
are via the appropriate TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector.
The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna, and all channel elements
from the MCCs are forward link disabled. The BBX is keyed up, using
both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot
channel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX power output is set to
40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or
RFDS directional coupler).
The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the Pilot
channel element digital waveform quality (rho) in dB, verifying that the
result meets system tolerances:
 Waveform quality (rho) should be w0.912 (-0.4dB).
The BBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to
assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna path
under test. The test is then repeated.
See Table 4-1 to perform this test.
4-10
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test
68P09255A61-4
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test
Pilot Offset Acceptance Test
This test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element Pilot Time Offset
of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the current
CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the external
calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements
are via the appropriate TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector.
The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna, and all TCH elements from
the MCCs are forward link disabled. The BBX is keyed up, using both
bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot
channel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX power output is set to
40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or
RFDS directional coupler).
The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the Pilot
Time Offset in µs, verifying results meet system tolerances:
 Pilot Time Offset should be within v3 ms of the target PT
Offset (0 ms).
The BBX then de-keys, and if selected, the MCC is re-configured to
assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna path
under test. The test is then repeated.
See Table 4-1 to perform this test.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
4-11
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test
68P09255A61-4
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test
Code Domain Power Test
This test verifies the Code Domain Power/Noise of each BBX carrier
keyed up at a specific frequency per the current CDF file assignment.
All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set controlled by
the same command. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT
(BTS/RFDS) connector.
For each sector/antenna under test, the Pilot Gain is set to 262. All MCC
channel elements under test are configured to generate Orthogonal
Channel Noise Source (OCNS) on different odd Walsh codes and to be
assigned a full-rate gain of 81. The maximum number of MCC/CEs to
be tested an any one time is 32 (32 odd Walsh codes). If more than 32
CEs exist, then multiple sets of measurements are made; so all channel
elements are verified on all sectors.
BBX power output is set to 40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT
connector (on either the BTS or RFDS directional coupler).
Verify the code domain power levels, which have been set for all ODD
numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This is done by
verifying that Pilot Power (dBm) minus OCNS Power (dBm) is equal to
10.2 $ 2 dB and that the noise floor of all “OFF” Walsh channels
measures v -27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channel power).
NOTE
When performing this test using the LMF and the MCC is an MCC8E
or MCC24E, the redundant BBX may fail or show marginal
performance. This is due to a timing mismatch that the LMF does not
address. Performing this test from the CBSC will not have this timing
problem.
The BBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to
assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna path
under test. The test is then repeated. Upon completion of the test, the
OCNS is disabled on the specified MCC/CE.
See Table 4-1 to perform this test.
4-12
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
68P09255A61-4
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test
Figure 4-2: Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Levels
Pilot Channel
PILOT LEVEL
MAX OCNS
CHANNEL
8.2 dB
12.2 dB
MAX OCNS SPEC.
Active channels
MIN OCNS SPEC.
MIN OCNS
CHANNEL
MAX NOISE
FLOOR
MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:
< -27 dB SPEC.
Inactive channels
Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
...
64
Showing all OCNS Passing
Pilot Channel
PILOT LEVEL
FAILURE - EXCEEDS
MAX OCNS SPEC.
8.2 dB
12.2 dB
MAX OCNS SPEC.
Active channels
MIN OCNS SPEC.
FAILURE - DOES NOT
MEET MIN OCNS SPEC.
FAILURE - EXCEEDS MAX
NOISE FLOOR SPEC.
MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:
< -27 dB
Inactive channels
Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
...
Indicating Failures
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
64
FW00283
4-13
RX Frame Error Rate (FER) Acceptance Test
68P09255A61-4
RX Frame Error Rate (FER) Acceptance Test
FER Test
This test verifies the BTS FER on all traffic channel elements currently
configured on all equipped MCCs (full rate at 1% FER) at an RF input
level of -119 dBm [or -116 dBm if using Tower Top
Amplifier (TMPC)]. All tests are performed using the external calibrated
test set as the signal source controlled by the same command. All
measurements are via the LMF.
The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each TX antenna, and all channel
elements from the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX is keyed
up, using only bbxlvl level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with
pilot channel element only). BBX power output is set to -20 dBm as
measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDS
directional coupler). The BBX must be keyed to enable the RX receive
circuitry.
The LMF prompts the MCC/CE under test to measure all zero longcode
and provide the FER report on the selected active MCC on the reverse
link for both the main and diversity RX antenna paths, verifying that
results meet the following specification:
 FER returned less than 1% and total frames measured is 1500
All MCC/CEs selected are tested on the specified RX antenna path. The
BBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to assign
the applicable redundant BBX to the current RX antenna paths under
test. The test is then repeated.
See Table 4-1 to perform this test.
4-14
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Generate an ATP Report
68P09255A61-4
Generate an ATP Report
Background
Each time an ATP test is run, an ATP report is updated to include the
results of the most recent ATP tests if the Save Results button is used to
close the status report window. The ATP report is not updated if the
status reports window is closed using the Dismiss button.
ATP Report
Each time an ATP test is run, a separate report is created for each BTS
and includes the following for each test:
Test name
BBX number
Channel number
Carrier number
Sector number
Upper test limit
Lower test limit
Test result
PASS or FAIL
Description information (if applicable)
Time stamp
Details/Warning information (if applicable)
The report can be printed if the LMF computer is connected to a printer.
Follow the procedure in the Table 4-2 to view and/or print the ATP
report for a BTS.
Table 4-2: Generating an ATP Report
 Step
Action
Click on the Login tab (if not in the forefront).
Select the desired BTS from the available Base Station pick list.
Click on the Report button.
Click on a column heading to sort the report.
Aug 2002
- If not desiring a printable file copy, click on the Dismiss button.
- If requiring a printable file copy, select the desired file type in the picklist and click on the
Save button.
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
4-15
Generate an ATP Report
68P09255A61-4
Notes
4-16
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Chapter 5
Prepare to Leave the Site
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
5-1
Prepare to Leave the Site
68P09255A61-4
Prepare to Leave the Site
External Test Equipment Removal
Perform the procedure in Table 5-1 to disconnect the test equipment and
configure the BTS for active service.
Table 5-1: External Test Equipment Removal
Step
Action
Disconnect all external test equipment from all TX and RX connectors on the top of the frame.
Reconnect and visually inspect all TX and RX antenna feed lines at the top of the frame.
5-2
CAUTION
Verify that all sector antenna feed lines are connected to the
correct ports on the frame. Crossed antenna cables will cause
system degradation of call processing.
NOTE
Each module or device can be in any state prior to downloading.
Each module or device will be in an OOS_RAM state after
downloading has completed.
- For all LMF commands, information in italics represents
valid ranges for that command field.
- Only those fields requiring an input will be specified.
Default values for other fields will be assumed.
- For more complete command examples (including system
response details), refer to the CDMA LMF User Guide.
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Prepare to Leave the Site
68P09255A61-4
Reset All Devices
Reset all devices by cycling power before leaving the site. The
configuration data and code loads could be different from data and code
on the LMF. By resetting all devices, the CBSC can load the proper data
and code when the span is active again.
Follow the procedure in Table 5-2 as required to bring all processor
modules from the OOS to INS mode.
NOTE
Have the CBSC/MM bring up the site and enable all devices at
the BTS.
Table 5-2: Enabling Devices
 Step
Action
On the LMF, select the device(s) you wish to enable.
NOTE
The MGLI and CSM must be INS before an MCC can be put INS.
Click on Device from the menu bar.
Click on Enable from the Device menu.
A status report window is displayed.
NOTE
If a BBX is selected, a Transceiver Parameters window is displayed to collect keying
information.
Do not enable the BBX.
Click OK to close the Transceiver Parameters window.
A status report window displays the status of the device.
Click OK to close the status report window.
The selected devices that successfully change to INS change color to green.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
5-3
Prepare to Leave the Site
68P09255A61-4
Re-connect BTS T1 Spans and Integrated Frame Modem
Before leaving the site, connect any T1 span TELCO connectors that
were removed to allow the LMF to control the BTS. Refer to Table 5-3
and Figure 5-1 as required.
Table 5-3: T1/E1 Span/IFM Connections
Step
Action
Connect the 50-pin TELCO cables to the BTS span I/O board 50-pin TELCO connectors.
If used, connect the dial-up modem RS-232 serial cable to the Site I/O board RS-232 9-pin
sub D connector.
NOTE
Verify that you connect both SPAN cables (if removed previously), and the Integrated Frame
Modem (IFM) “TELCO” connector.
Figure 5-1: Site and Span I/O Boards T1 Span Connections
50-PIN TELCO
CONNECTORS
REMOVED
SPAN A CONNECTOR
(TELCO) INTERFACE
TO SPAN LINES
SPAN B CONNECTOR
(TELCO) INTERFACE
TO SPAN LINES
RS-232 9-PIN SUB D
CONNECTOR SERIAL
PORT FOR EXTERNAL
DIAL UP MODEM
CONNECTION (IF USED)
TOP of Frame
(Site I/O and Span I/O boards)
FW00299
5-4
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Prepare to Leave the Site
68P09255A61-4
BTS Site Span Configuration Verification
Perform the procedure in Table 5-4 to verify the current Span Framing
Format and Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI2/GLI2
boards in all C-CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span should be
verified.
Table 5-4: BTS Span Parameter Configuration
Step
Action
Connect a serial cable from the LMF COM1 port (via null modem board) to the front panel of the
MGLI2 MMI port (see Figure 5-2).
Start an MMI communication session with MGLI2 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see
Table 3-5 on page 3-11).
NOTE
The LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is being
used for the MMI session.
Enter the following MMI command to display the current MGLI2/GLI2 framing format and line code
configuration (in bold type):
span view 
Observe a display similar to the options shown below:
COMMAND ACCEPTED: span view
The parameter in NVM is set to T1_2.
The frame format in flash
Equalization:
Span A - Default (0-131
Span B - Default (0-131
Span C - Default (0-131
Span
D - D
Default
f lt (0
(0-131
131
Span E - Default (0-131
Span F - Default (0-131
is set to use T1_2.
feet
feet
feet
feet
feet
feet
for
for
for
for
for
for
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
120
120
120
120
120
120
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Oh
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
for
for
for
for
for
for
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
Linkspeed: Default (56K for T1 D4 AMI, 64K otherwise)
Currently, the link is running at the default rate
The actual rate is 0
NOTE
Defaults for span equalization are 0-131 feet for T1/J1 spans and 120 Ohm for E1.
Default linkspeed is 56K for T1 D4 AMI spans and 64K for all other types.
There is no need to change from defaults unless the OMC-R/CBSC span configuration requires it.
If the current MGLI2/GLI2 framing format and line code configuration does not display the correct
choice, proceed to Table 5-5.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 for all remaining GLIs.
Exit the GLI MMI session and HyperTerminal connection by selecting File from the connection
window menu bar, and then Exit from the drop-down menu.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
5-5
Prepare to Leave the Site
68P09255A61-4
Figure 5-2: MGLI2/GLI2 MMI Port Connection
RS-232 CABLE
FROM LMF COM1
PORT
GLI BOARD
NULL MODEM BOARD
(PART# 8484877P01)
9-PIN TO 9- PIN
RS-232 CABLE
MMI SERIAL PORT
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÁÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÁÁ
Á
Á Á
FW00344
Set BTS Site Span Configuration
Perform the procedure in Table 5-5 to configure the Span Framing
Format and Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI2/GLI2
boards in all C-CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span must be
configured.
NOTE
Perform the following procedure ONLY if span configurations
loaded in the MGLI2/GLI2s do not match those in the
OMCR/CBSC data base, AND ONLY when the exact
configuration data is available. Loading incorrect span
configuration data will render the site inoperable.
Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
Step
Action
If not already done, connect a serial cable from the LMF COM1 port (via null modem board) to the
front panel of the MGLI2 MMI port (see Figure 5-2).
Start an MMI communication session with CSM-1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see
Table 3-5 on page 3-11).
NOTE
The LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is being
used for the MMI session.
. . . continued on next page
5-6
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Prepare to Leave the Site
68P09255A61-4
Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
Step
Action
If required only, enter the following MMI command for each span line to set the BTS span parameters
to match that of the physical spans a - f run to the site:
span_config     
option#1 = the span to change (a - f)
option#2 = the span type (0 - 8):
0 - E1_1 (HDB3, CCS, CRC-4)
1 - E1_2 (HDB3, CCS)
2 - E1_3 (HDB3, CAS, CRC-4, TS16)
3 - E1_4 (HDB3, CAS, TS16)
4 - T1_1 (AMI, DS1 AT&T D4, without ZCS, 3 to 1 packing, Group 0 unusable)
5 - T1_2 (B8ZS, DS1 AT&T ESF, 4 to 1 packing, 64K link)
6 - J1_1 (B8ZS, J1 AT&T ESF, Japan CRC6, 4 to 1 packing)
7 - J1_2 (B8ZS, J1 AT&T ESF, US CRC6, 4 to 1 packing)
8 - T1_3 (AMI, DS1 AT&T D4, with ZCS, 3 to 1 packing, Group 0 unusable)
option#3 = the link speed (56 or 64) Kbps
option#4 = the span equalization (0 - 7):
0 - T1_6 (T1,J1:long haul)
1 - T1_4 (T1,J1:393-524 feet)
2 - T1_4 (T1,J1:131-262 feet)
3 - E1_75 (E1:75 Ohm)
4 - T1_4 (T1,J1:0-131 feet)
5 - T1_4 (T1,J1:524-655 feet)
6 - T1_4 (T1,J1:262-393 feet)
7 - E1_120 (E1:120 Ohm)
option#5 = the slot that has LAPD channel (0 - 31)
Example for setting span configuration to E1_2, 64 Kbps, E1_120-Ohm, LAPD channel 1:
span_config a 1 64 7 1
span_config f 1 64 7 1
Example for setting span configuration to T1_2, 64 Kbps, T1_4 (0-131 feet), LAPD channel 0:
span_config a 5 64 4 0
span_config f 5 64 4 0
NOTE
Make sure that spans a - f are set to the same span type and link speed. The equalization may be
different for each individual span.
After executing the span_config command, the affected MGLI2/GLI2 board MUST be reset and
re-loaded for changes to take effect.
Although defaults are shown, always consult site specific documentation for span type and rate used at
the site.
Press the RESET button on the GLI2 for changes to take effect.
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
5-7
Prepare to Leave the Site
68P09255A61-4
Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
Step
Action
This completes the site specific BTS Span setup for this GLI. Move the MMI cable to the next GLI2
and repeat steps 1 and 4 for ALL MGLI2/GLI2 boards.
Terminate the Hyperterm session and disconnect the LMF from the MGLI/SGLI.
Updating CBSC LMF Files
Updated calibration (CAL) file information must be moved from the
LMF Windows environment back to the CBSC, which resides in a Unix
environment. The procedures that follow detail how to move files from
one environment to the other.
Backup CAL Data to a Diskette
The BLO calibration files should be backed up to a diskette (per BTS).
Follow the procedure in Table 5-6 to copy CAL files from a CDMA
LMF computer to a diskette.
Table 5-6: Backup CAL Data to a Diskette
 Step
Action
Insert a diskette into the LMF A drive.
NOTE
If your diskette has not been formatted, format it using Windows. The diskette must be DOS
formatted before copying any files. Consult your Windows/DOS documentation or on-line help
on how to format diskettes.
5-8
Click on the Start button and launch the Windows Explorer program from the Programs menu.
Click on your C: drive.
Double Click on the wlmf folder.
Double Click on the CDMA folder.
Click on the bts-# folder for the calibration file you want to copy.
Drag the BTS-#.cal file to the 3-1/2 floppy (A:) icon on the top left of the screen and release the
mouse button.
Repeat steps 6 and 7 until you have copied each file desired.
Close the Windows Explorer program by selecting Close from the File menu option.
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Prepare to Leave the Site
68P09255A61-4
LMF Removal
CAUTION
DO NOT power down the LMF without performing the
procedure indicated below. Corrupted/lost data files may result,
and in some cases, the LMF may lock up.
Follow the procedure in Table 5-7 to terminate the LMF session and
remove the terminal.
Table 5-7: LMF Termination and Removal
 Step
Action
From the CDMA window select File>Exit.
From the Windows Task Bar click Start>Shutdown.
Click Yes when the Shut Down Windows message appears.
Disconnect the LMF terminal Ethernet connector from the BTS cabinet.
Disconnect the LMF serial port, the RS-232 to GPIB interface box, and the GPIB cables as
required for equipment transport.
Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC
Follow the procedure in Table 5-8 to copy CAL files from a diskette to
the CBSC.
Table 5-8: Procedures to Copy CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC
 Step
Action
Login to the CBSC on the workstation using your account name and password.
NOTE
Enter the information that appears in bold text.
Place your diskette containing CAL file(s) in the CBSC workstation diskette drive.
Type eject -q and press the  key.
Type mount and press the  key.
Verify that floppy/no_name is displayed.
NOTE
If the eject command has been previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a
number. Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed.
Enter cd /floppy/no_name and press the  key.
Enter ls -lia and press the  key.
Verify that the bts-#.cal file is on the diskette.
Enter cd and press the  key.
Enter pwd and press the  key.
Verify that you are in your home directory (/home/).
Enter dos2unix /floppy/no_name/bts-#.cal bts-#.cal and press the  key (where # is the
BTS number).
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
5-9
Prepare to Leave the Site
68P09255A61-4
Table 5-8: Procedures to Copy CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC
 Step
Action
10
Enter ls -l *.cal and press the  key.
Verify that the CAL file was successfully copied.
11
Type eject and press the  key.
12
Remove the diskette from the workstation.
Re-establish OMC-R Control/ Verifying T1/E1
NOTE
After all activities at the site have been completed, and after
disconnecting the LMF, place a phone call to the OMC-R and
request the BTS be placed under control of the OMC-R.
5-10
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Chapter 6
Basic Troubleshooting
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
6-1
Basic Troubleshooting Overview
68P09255A61-4
Basic Troubleshooting Overview
Overview
The information in this section addresses some of the scenarios likely to
be encountered by Cellular Field Engineering (CFE) team members.
This troubleshooting guide was created as an interim reference document
for use in the field. It provides basic “what to do if” basic
troubleshooting suggestions when the BTS equipment does not perform
per the procedure documented in the manual.
Comments are consolidated from inputs provided by CFEs in the field
and information gained form experience in Motorola labs and
classrooms.
6-2
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Troubleshooting: Installation
68P09255A61-4
Troubleshooting: Installation
Cannot Log into Cell-Site
Follow the procedure in Table 6-1 to troubleshoot a login failure.
Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures
 Step
Action
If the MGLI LED is solid RED, it implies a hardware failure. Reset the MGLI by re-seating it. If
this persists, install a known good MGLI card in the MGLI slot and retry. A Red LED may also
indicate no Ethernet termination at top of frame.
Verify that T1 is disconnected (see Table 3-1 on page 3-5).
If T1 is still connected, verify the CBSC has disabled the BTS.
Try pinging the MGLI (see Table 3-6 on page 3-14).
Verify the LMF is connected to the Primary LMF port (LAN A) in the front of the BTS (see
Table 3-2 on page 3-6).
Verify the LMF was configured properly (see Preparing the LMF section starting on page 3-6).
Verify the BTS-LMF cable is RG-58 [flexible black cable of less than 76 cm (2.5 feet) length].
Verify the Ethernet ports are terminated properly (see Figure 3-4 on page 3-13).
Verify a T-adapter is not used on the LMF side port if connected to the BTS front LMF primary
port.
Try connecting to the I/O panel (top of frame). Use BNC T-adapters at the LMF port for this
connection.
10
Re-boot the LMF and retry.
11
Re-seat the MGLI and retry.
12
Verify IP addresses are configured properly.
Cannot Communicate to Power Meter
Follow the procedure in Table 6-2 to troubleshoot a power meter
communication failure.
Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure
 Step
Action
Verify the Power Meter is connected to the LMF with a GPIB adapter.
Verify the cable setup as specified in Chapter 3.
Verify the GPIB address of the power meter is set to the same value displayed in the applicable
GPIB address box of the LMF Options window Test Equipment tab. Refer to Table 3-24 or
Table 3-25 and the GPIB Addresses section of Appendix J for details.
Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct. Refer to the CDMA 2000 Test Equipment
Preparation section of Appendix F for details.
. . . continued on next page
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
6-3
Troubleshooting: Installation
68P09255A61-4
Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure
 Step
Action
Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be
‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then cycle GPIB box power and
retry.
Verify the LMF computer COM1 port is not used by another application; for example, if a
HyperTerminal window is open for MMI, close it.
Reset all test equipment by clicking Util in the BTS menu bar and selecting
Test Equipment>Reset from the pull-down lists.
Cannot Communicate to Communications Analyzer
Follow the procedure in Table 6-3 to troubleshoot a communications
analyzer communication failure.
Table 6-3: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication Failure
 Step
Verify signal generator is connected to LMF with GPIB adapter.
Verify cable connections as specified in Chapter 3.
Verify the signal generator GPIB address is set to the same value displayed in the applicable GPIB
address box of the LMF Options window Test Equipment tab. Refer to Table 3-24 or Table 3-25
and the GPIB Address section of Appendix J for details.
Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct. Refer to the CDMA 2000 Test Equipment
Preparation section of Appendix F for details.
Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be
‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then cycle the GPIB box power
and retry.
Verify the LMF computer COM1 port is not used by another application; for example, if a
HyperTerminal window is open for MMI, close it.
Reset all test equipment by clicking Util in the BTS menu bar and selecting
Test Equipment>Reset from the pull-down lists.
6-4
Action
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Troubleshooting: Download
68P09255A61-4
Troubleshooting: Download
Cannot Download CODE to Any Device (card)
Follow the procedure in Table 6-4 to troubleshoot a code download
failure.
Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure
 Step
Action
Verify T1 is disconnected from the BTS.
Verify the LMF can communicate with the BTS device using the Status function.
Communication to the MGLI must first be established before trying to talk to any other BTS
device.
The MGLI must be INS_ACT state (green).
Verify the card is physically present in the cage and powered-up.
If the card LED is solid RED, it implies hardware failure.
Reset the card by re-seating it.
If the LED remains solid red, replace with a card from another slot & retry.
NOTE
The card can only be replaced by a card of the same type.
Re-seat the card and try again.
If BBX reports a failure message and is OOS_RAM, the code load was OK.
If the download portion completes and the reset portion fails, reset the device by selecting the
device and Reset.
If a BBX or an MCC remains OOS_ROM (blue) after code download, use the LMF
Device > Status function to verify that the code load was accepted.
10
If the code load was accepted, use LMF Device > Download > Flash to load RAM code into flash
memory.
Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card)
Perform the procedure in Table 6-5 to troubleshoot a data download
failure.
Table 6-5: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure
 Step
Aug 2002
Action
Re-seat the card and repeat code and data load procedure.
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
6-5
Troubleshooting: Download
68P09255A61-4
Cannot ENABLE Device
Before a device can be enabled (placed in-service), it must be in the
OOS_RAM state (yellow) with data downloaded to the device. The color
of the device changes to green once it is enabled.
The three states that devices can be changed to are as follows:
 Enabled (green, INS)
 Disabled (yellow, OOS_RAM)
 Reset (blue, OOS_ROM)
Follow the procedure in Table 6-6 to troubleshoot a device enable
failure.
Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure
 Step
Action
Re-seat the card and repeat the code and data load procedure.
If the CSM cannot be enabled, verify the CDF file has correct latitude and longitude data for cell
site location and GPS sync.
Ensure the primary CSM is in INS_ACT state.
NOTE
MCCs will not go INS without the CSM being INS.
Verify the 19.6608 MHz CSM clock; MCCs will not go INS otherwise.
The BBX should not be enabled for ATP tests.
If MCCs give “invalid or no system time”, verify the CSM is operable.
Miscellaneous Errors
Perform the procedure in Table 6-7 to troubleshoot miscellaneous
failures.
Table 6-7: Miscellaneous Failures
 Step
6-6
Action
If LPAs continue to give alarms, even after cycling power at the circuit breakers, then connect an
MMI cable to the LPA and set up a Hyperterminal connection (see Table 3-5 on page 3-11).
Enter ALARMS in the Hyperterminal window.
The resulting LMF display may provide an indication of the problem.
(Call Field Support for further assistance.)
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Troubleshooting: Calibration
68P09255A61-4
Troubleshooting: Calibration
Bay Level Offset Calibration Failure
Perform the procedure in Table 6-8 to troubleshoot a BLO calibration
failure.
Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure
 Step
Action
Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (see the test equipment setup section in Chapter 3)
and connection is made to the proper TX port.
Verify the parameters in the bts-#.cdf file are set correctly for the following bands:
For 1900 MHz:
Bandclass=1; Freq_Band=16; SSType=16
For 800 MHz:
Bandclass=0; Freq_Band=8; SSType=8
For 1700 MHz:
Bandclass=4; Freq_Band=128; SSType=16
Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED).
Reset the LPA by pulling the circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors from the sensor
head.
Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up.
Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be ‘ON’ (Power and Ready).
If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box and
retry.
Verify the sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm) Power Ref
signal.
If communication between the LMF and Power Meter is operational, the Meter display will show
“RES”.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
6-7
Troubleshooting: Calibration
68P09255A61-4
Cannot Load BLO
For Load BLO failures see Table 6-7.
Calibration Audit Failure
Follow the procedure in Table 6-9 to troubleshoot a calibration audit
failure.
Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure
 Step
Action
Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (refer to the test equipment setup section of
Chapter 3).
Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors from the sensor
head.
Verify that no LPA is in alarm state (rapidly flashing red LED).
Reset the LPA by pulling the circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
Verify that no sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm) Power
Ref signal.
After calibration, the BLO data must be re-loaded to the BBXs before auditing.
Click on the BBX(s) and select Device>Download BLO.
Re-try the audit.
Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up.
Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be “ON” (Power and Ready).
If any other LED is continuously “ON”, power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box and
retry.
6-8
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP
68P09255A61-4
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP
BTS passed Reduced ATP tests but has forward link problem during normal
operation
Follow the procedure in Table 6-10 to troubleshoot a Forward Link
problem during normal operation.
Table 6-10: Troubleshooting Forward Link Failure (BTS Passed Reduced ATP)
 Step
Action
Perform these additional TX tests to troubleshoot a forward link problem:
- TX mask
- TX rho
- TX code domain
Cannot Perform TX Mask Measurement
Follow the procedure in Table 6-11 to troubleshoot a TX mask
measurement failure.
Table 6-11: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure
 Step
Action
Verify that TX audit passes for the BBX(s).
If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.
Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED).
Re-set the LPA by pulling the circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing it back in.
Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset Measurement
Follow the procedure in Table 6-12 to troubleshoot a rho or pilot time
offset measurement failure.
Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure
 Step
Action
Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.
Verify PN offsets displayed on the analyzer is the same as the PN offset in the CDF file.
Re-load BBX data and repeat the test.
If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.
Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset the LPA by pulling the
circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
If Rho value is unstable and varies considerably (e.g. .95,.92,.93), this may indicate that the GPS
is still phasing (i.e., trying to reach and maintain 0 freq. error).
Go to the freq. bar in the upper right corner of the Rho meter and select Hz. Press 
and enter 10, to obtain an average Rho value. This is an indication the GPS has not stabilized
before going INS and may need to be re-initialized.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
6-9
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP
68P09255A61-4
Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement
Perform the procedure in Table 6-13 to troubleshoot a code domain and
noise floor measurement failure.
Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement Failure
 Step
Action
Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.
Verify PN offset displayed on analyzer is same as PN offset being used in the CDF file.
Disable and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent of failure).
6-10
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP
68P09255A61-4
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP
Multi-FER Test Failure
Perform the procedure in Table 6-14 to troubleshoot a Multi-FER
failure.
Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure
 Step
Action
Verify the test equipment set up is correct for an FER test.
Verify the test equipment is locked to 19.6608 and even second clocks.
On the HP8921A test set, the yellow LED (REF UNLOCK) must be OFF.
Verify the MCCs have been loaded with data and are INS-ACT.
Disable and re-enable the MCC (one or more based on extent of failure).
Disable, re-load code and data, and re-enable the MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent of
failure).
Verify the antenna connections to frame are correct based on the directions messages.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
6-11
Troubleshooting: CSM Check-list
68P09255A61-4
Troubleshooting: CSM Check-list
Problem Description
Many of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) board failures may
be resolved in the field before sending the boards to the factory for
repair. This section describes known CSM problems identified in field
returns, some of which are field-repairable. Check these problems before
returning suspect CSM boards.
Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock/GPS Receiver Operation
If having any problems with CSM board kit numbers, SGLN1145 or
SGLN4132, check the suffix with the kit number. If the kit has version
“AB”, then replace with version “BC” or higher, and return model “AB”
to the repair center.
No GPS Reference Source
Check the CSM boards for proper hardware configuration. CSM kit
SGLN1145, in Slot l, has an on-board GPS receiver; while kit
SGLN4132, in Slot 2, does not have a GPS receiver. Any incorrectly
configured board must be returned to the repair center. Do not attempt to
change hardware configuration in the field. Also, verify the GPS
antenna is not damaged and is installed per recommended guidelines.
Checksum Failure
The CSM could have corrupted data in its firmware resulting in a
non-executable code. The problem is usually caused by either electrical
disturbance or interruption of data during a download. Attempt another
download with no interruptions in the data transfer. Return the CSM
board back to the repair center if the attempt to reload fails.
GPS Bad RX Message Type
This problem is believed to be caused by a later version of CSM
software (3.5 or higher) being downloaded, via LMF, followed by an
earlier version of CSM software (3.4 or lower), being downloaded from
the CBSC. Download again with CSM software code 3.5 or higher.
Return the CSM board back to the repair center if the attempt to reload
fails.
CSM Reference Source Configuration Error
This problem is caused by incorrect reference source configuration
performed in the field by software download. CSM kits SGLN1145 and
SGLN4132 must have proper reference sources configured (as shown
below) to function correctly.
CSM Kit
No.
Hardware
Configuration
CSM Slot
No.
Reference Source
Configuration
CDF Value
SGLN1145
With GPS Receiver
Primary = Local GPS
Backup = Either LFR or HSO
2 or 18
SGLN4132
Without GPS Receiver
Primary = Remote GPS
Backup = Either LFR or HSO
2 or 18
6-12
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Troubleshooting: CSM Check-list
68P09255A61-4
Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INS
This problem may be caused by a delay in GPS acquisition. Check the
accuracy flag status and/or current position. Refer to the GSM system
time/GPS and LFR/HSO verification section in Chapter 3. At least one
satellite should be visible and tracked for the “surveyed” mode and four
satellites should be visible and tracked for the “estimated” mode. Also,
verify correct base site position data used in “surveyed” mode.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
6-13
C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting
68P09255A61-4
C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting
Introduction
The C-CCP backplane is a multi-layer board that interconnects all the
C-CCP modules. The complexity of this board lends itself to possible
improper diagnoses when problems occur.
Connector Functionality
The following connector overview describes the major types of
backplane connectors along with the functionality of each. This
information allows the CFE to:
 Determine which connector(s) is associated with a specific problem
type.
 Isolate problems to a specific cable or connector.
Primary “A” and Redundant “B” Inter Shelf Bus
Connectors
The 40 pin Inter Shelf Bus (ISB) connectors provide an interface bus
from the master GLI to all other GLIs in the modem frame. Their basic
function is to provide clock synchronization from the master GLI to all
other GLIs in the frame.
The ISB also provides the following functions:
 Span line grooming when a single span is used for multiple cages.
 MMI connection to/from the master GLI to cell site modem.
 Interface between GLIs and the AMR (for reporting BTS alarms).
Span Line Connector
The span line input is an 8-pin RJ-45 connector that provides a primary
and secondary (if used) span line interface to each GLI in the C-CCP
shelf. The span line is used for MM/EMX switch control of the Master
GLI and also all the BBX traffic.
Primary “A” and Redundant “B” Reference Distribution
Module Input/Output
The Reference Distribution Module (RDM) connectors route the 3 MHz
reference signals from the CSMs to the GLIs and all BBXs in the
backplane. The signals are used to phase lock loop all clock circuits on
the GLIs and BBX boards to produce precise clock and signal
frequencies.
Power Input (Return A, B, and C connectors)
Provides a +27 volt or -48 volt input for use by the power supply
modules.
6-14
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting
68P09255A61-4
Power Supply Module Interface
Each power supply module has a series of three different connectors to
provide the needed inputs/outputs to the C-CCP backplane. These
include a VCC/Ground input connector, a Harting style multiple pin
interface, and a +15 V/Analog Ground output connector. The C-CCP
Power Modules convert +27 or -48 Volts to a regulated +15, +6.5, and
+5.0 Volts to be used by the C-CCP shelf cards. In the -48 V BTS, the
LPA power modules convert -48 Volts to a regulated +27 Volts.
GLI Connector
This connector consists of a Harting 4SU digital connector and a
6-conductor coaxial connector for RDM distribution. The connectors
provide inputs/outputs for the GLIs in the C-CCP backplane.
GLI 10Base-2 Ethernet “A” and “B” Connections
These BNC connectors are located on the C-CCP backplane and routed
to the GLI board. This interface provides all the control and data
communications between the master GLI and the other GLI, between
gateways, and for the LMF on the LAN.
BBX Connector
Each BBX connector consists of a Harting 2SU/1SU digital connector
and two 6-conductor coaxial connectors. These connectors provide DC,
digital, and RF inputs/outputs for the BBXs in the C-CCP backplane.
CIO Connectors
 RX RF antenna path signal inputs are routed through RX Tri-Filters
(on the I/O plate), and via coaxial cables to the two MPC modules the six “A” (main) signals go to one MPC; the six “B” (diversity) to
the other. The MPC outputs the low-noise-amplified signals via the
C-CCP backplane to the CIO where the signals are split and sent to
the appropriate BBX.
 A digital bus then routes the baseband signal through the BBX, to the
backplane, then on to the MCC slots.
 Digital TX antenna path signals originate at the MCCs. Each output
is routed from the MCC slot via the backplane appropriate BBX.
 TX RF path signal originates from the BBX, through the backplane to
the CIO, through the CIO, and via multi-conductor coaxial cabling to
the LPAs in the LPA shelf.
C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 6-15 through Table 6-24 provide procedures for troubleshooting
problems that appear to be related to a defective C-CCP backplane. The
tables are broken down into possible problems and steps that should be
taken in an attempt to find the root cause.
NOTE
Aug 2002
Table 6-15 through Table 6-24 must be completed before
replacing ANY C-CCP backplane.
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
6-15
C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting
68P09255A61-4
Digital Control Problems
No GLI Control via LMF (all GLIs)
Follow the procedure in Table 6-15 to troubleshoot a GLI control via
LMF failure.
Table 6-15: No GLI Control via LMF (all GLIs)
 Step
Action
Check the 10Base-2 ethernet connector for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.
Verify the C-CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.
Visually check the master GLI connector (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the master GLI with a known good GLI.
No GLI Control through Span Line Connection (All GLIs)
Follow the procedures in Table 6-16 and Table 6-17 to troubleshoot GLI
control failures.
Table 6-16: No GLI Control through Span Line Connection (Both GLIs)
Step
Action
Verify the C-CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.
Verify that the BTS and GLIs are correctly configured in the OMCR/CBSC data base.
Visually check the master GLI connector (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the master GLI with a known good GLI.
Check the span line inputs from the top of the frame to the master GLI for proper connection and
damage.
Check the span line configuration on the MGLI (see Table 5-4 on page 5-5).
Table 6-17: MGLI Control Good - No Control over Co-located GLI
Step
Action
Verify that the BTS and GLIs are correctly configured in the OMCR CBSC data base.
Check the ethernet for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.
Visually check all GLI connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI.
6-16
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting
68P09255A61-4
No AMR Control (MGLI good)
Perform the procedure in Table 6-18 to troubleshoot an AMR control
failure when the MGLI control is good.
Table 6-18: MGLI Control Good - No Control over AMR
Step
Action
Visually check the master GLI connector (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the master GLI with a known good GLI.
Replace the AMR with a known good AMR.
No BBX Control in the Shelf - (No Control over
Co-located GLIs)
Perform the procedure in Table 6-19 to troubleshoot a BBX control in
the shelf failure.
Table 6-19: No BBX Control in the Shelf - No Control over Co-located GLIs
Step
Action
Visually check all GLI connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI.
Visually check BBX connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the BBX with a known good BBX.
No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic
Perform the procedure in Table 6-20 to troubleshoot a span line traffic
failure.
Table 6-20: MGLI Control Good - No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic
Step
Action
Visually check all GLI connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI.
Visually check all span line distribution (both connectors and cables) for damage.
If the problem seems to be limited to one BBX, replace the MGLI with a known good MGLI.
Perform the BTS Span Parameter Configuration ( see Table 5-4 on page 5-5).
Ensure that ISB cabling is correct.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
6-17
C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting
68P09255A61-4
No (or Missing) MCC Channel Elements
Perform the procedure in Table 6-21 to troubleshoot a channel elements
failure.
Table 6-21: No MCC Channel Elements
Step
Action
Verify CEs on a co-located MCC (MCC24 TYPE=2).
If the problem seems to be limited to one MCC, replace the MCC with a known good MCC.
- Check connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
If no CEs on any MCC:
- Verify clock reference to CIO.
Check the CDF for MCCTYPE=2 (MCC24) or MCCTYPE=0 (MCC8).
6-18
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting
68P09255A61-4
DC Power Problems
Perform the procedure in Table 6-22 to troubleshoot a DC input voltage
to power supply module failure.
WARNING
Potentially lethal voltage and current levels are routed to the
BTS equipment. This test must be carried out with a second
person present, acting in a safety role. Remove all rings, jewelry,
and wrist watches prior to beginning this test.
No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module
Table 6-22: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module
Step
Action
Verify DC power is applied to the BTS frame.
Verify there are no breakers tripped.
* IMPORTANT
If a breaker has tripped, remove all modules from the applicable shelf supplied by the breaker and
attempt to reset it.
- If the breaker trips again, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame.
- If the breaker does not trip, there is probably a defective module or sub-assembly within the shelf.
Verify that the C-CCP shelf breaker on the BTS frame breaker panel is functional.
Use a voltmeter to determine if the input voltage is being routed to the C-CCP backplane by
measuring the DC voltage level on the PWR_IN cable.
- If the voltage is not present, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame.
- If the voltage is present at the connector, reconnect and measure the level at the “VCC” power
feed clip on the distribution backplane.
- If the voltage is correct at the power clip, inspect the clip for damage.
If everything appears to be correct, visually inspect the power supply module connectors.
Replace the power supply module with a known good module.
If steps 1 through 5 fail to indicate a problem, a C-CCP backplane failure (possibly an open trace) has
occurred.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
6-19
C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting
68P09255A61-4
No DC Voltage (+5, +6.5, or +15 Volts) to a Specific GLI,
BBX, or Switchboard
Perform the procedure in Table 6-23 to troubleshoot a DC input voltage
to GLI, BBX, or Switchboard failure.
Table 6-23: No DC Input Voltage to any C-CCP Shelf Module
Step
Action
Verify the steps in Table 6-22 have been performed.
Inspect the defective board/module (both board and backplane) connector for damage.
Replace suspect board/module with known good board/module.
TX and RX Signal Routing Problems
Perform the procedure in Table 6-24 to troubleshoot TX and RX signal
routing problems.
Table 6-24: TX and RX Signal Routing Problems
Step
Action
Inspect all Harting Cable connectors and back-plane connectors for damage in all the affected board
slots.
Perform steps in the RF path troubleshooting flowchart in this manual.
6-20
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
68P09255A61-4
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
Module Status Indicators
Each of the non-passive plug-in modules has a bi-color (green & red)
LED status indicator located on the module front panel. The indicator is
labeled PWR/ALM. If both colors are turned on, the indicator is yellow.
Each plug-in module, except for the fan module, has its own alarm
(fault) detection circuitry that controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.
The fan TACH signal of each fan module is monitored by the AMR.
Based on the status of this signal, the AMR controls the state of the
PWR/ALM LED on the fan module.
LED Status Combinations for All Modules (except GLI, CSM, BBX, MCC)
PWR/ALM LED
The following list describes the states of the module status indicator.
 Solid GREEN - module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.
 Solid RED - module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due to
electrical hardware failure.
Note that a fault (alarm) indication may or may not be due to a complete
module failure and normal service may or may not be reduced or
interrupted.
DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations
The PWR CNVTR has alarm (fault) detection circuitry that controls the
state of the PWR/ALM LED. This is true for both the C-CCP and LPA
power converters.
PWR/ALM LED
The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED.
 Solid GREEN - module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.
 Solid RED - module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due to
electrical hardware problem.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
6-21
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
68P09255A61-4
CSM LED Status Combinations
PWR/ALM LED
The CSMs include on-board alarm detection. Hardware and
software/firmware alarms are indicated via the front panel indicators.
After the memory tests, the CSM loads OOS-RAM code from the Flash
EPROM, if available. If not available, the OOS-ROM code is loaded
from the Flash EPROM.
 Solid GREEN - module is INS_ACT or INS_STBY no alarm.
 Solid RED - Initial power up or module is operating in a fault (alarm)
condition.
 Slowly Flashing GREEN - OOS_ROM no alarm.
 Long RED/Short GREEN - OOS_ROM alarm.
 Rapidly Flashing GREEN - OOS_RAM no alarm or INS_ACT in
DUMB mode.
 Short RED/Short GREEN - OOS_RAM alarm.
 Long GREEN/Short RED - INS_ACT or INS_STBY alarm.
 Off - no DC power or on-board fuse is open.
 Solid YELLOW - After a reset, the CSMs begin to boot. During
SRAM test and Flash EPROM code check, the LED is yellow. (If
SRAM or Flash EPROM fail, the LED changes to a solid RED and
the CSM attempts to reboot.)
Figure 6-1: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports
SYNC
MONITOR
PWR/ALM
Indicator
FREQ
MONITOR
FW00303
. . . continued on next page
6-22
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
68P09255A61-4
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
FREQ Monitor Connector
A test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allows
monitoring of the 19.6608 MHz clock generated by the CSM. When
both CSM 1 and CSM 2 are in an in-service (INS) condition, the CSM 2
clock signal frequency is the same as that output by CSM 1.
The clock is a sine wave signal with a minimum amplitude of +2 dBm
(800 mVpp) into a 50 Ω load connected to this port.
SYNC Monitor Connector
A test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allows
monitoring of the “Even Second Tick” reference signal generated by the
CSMs.
At this port, the reference signal is a TTL active high signal with a pulse
width of 153 nanoseconds.
MMI Connector - Only accessible behind front panel. The
RS-232 MMI port connector is intended to be used primarily in
the development or factory environment, but may be used in the
field for debug/maintenance purposes.
GLI2 LED Status Combinations
The GLI2 module has indicators, controls and connectors as described
below and shown in Figure 6-2.
The operating states of the 5 LEDs are:
ACTIVE
Solid GREEN - GLI2 is active. This means that the GLI2 has shelf
control and is providing control of the digital interfaces.
Off - GLI2 is not active (i.e., Standby). The mate GLI2 should be
active.
MASTER
 Solid GREEN - GLI2 is Master (sometimes referred to as MGLI2).
 Off - GLI2 is non-master (i.e., Slave).
ALARM
 Solid RED - GLI2 is in a fault condition or in reset.
 While in reset transition, STATUS LED is OFF while GLI2 is
performing ROM boot (about 12 seconds for normal boot).
 While in reset transition, STATUS LED is ON while GLI2 is
performing RAM boot (about 4 seconds for normal boot).
 Off - No Alarm.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
6-23
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
68P09255A61-4
STATUS
 Flashing GREEN- GLI2 is in service (INS), in a stable operating
condition.
 On - GLI2 is in OOS RAM state operating downloaded code.
 Off - GLI2 is in OOS ROM state operating boot code.
SPANS
 Solid GREEN - Span line is connected and operating.
 Solid RED - Span line is disconnected or a fault condition exists.
GLI2 Pushbuttons and Connectors
RESET Pushbutton - Depressing the RESET pushbutton
causes a partial reset of the CPU and a reset of all board devices.
The GLI2 is placed in the OOS_ROM state
MMI Connector - The RS-232MMI port connector is intended
to be used primarily in the development or factory environment
but may be used in the field for debug/maintenance purposes.
LAN Connectors (A & B) - The two 10BASE2 Ethernet circuit
board mounted BNC connectors are located on the bottom front
edge of the GLI2; one for each LAN interface, A & B. Ethernet
cabling is connected to tee connectors fastened to these BNC
connectors.
6-24
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
68P09255A61-4
Figure 6-2: GLI2 Front Panel
LED
ALARM LED
ALARM
SPANS LED
SPANS
ACTIVE
ACTIVE LED
MMI
MMI PORT
CONNECTOR
OFF − operating normally
ON − briefly during power−up when the Alarm LED turns OFF.
SLOW GREEN − when the GLI2 is INS (in−service)
RESET
All functions on the GLI2 are reset when pressing and releasing
the switch.
ALARM
OFF − operating normally
ON − briefly during power−up when the Alarm LED turns OFF.
SLOW GREEN − when the GLI2 is INS (in−service)
SPANS
OFF − card is powered down, in initialization, or in standby
GREEN − operating normally
YELLOW − one or more of the equipped initialized spans is receiving
a remote alarm indication signal from the far end
RED − one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in an alarm
state
MASTER
The pair of GLI2 cards include a redundant status. The card in the
top shelf is designated by hardware as the active card; the card in
the bottom shelf is in the standby mode.
ON − operating normally in active mode
OFF − operating normally in standby mode
MASTER
MASTER LED
STATUS
RESET
RESET
PUSHBUTTON
STATUS
STATUS LED
OPERATING STATUS
An RS−232, serial, asynchronous communications link for use as
MMI PORT
CONNECTOR an MMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to a maximum of
115,200 baud communications.
ACTIVE
Shows the operating status of the redundant cards. The redundant
card toggles automatically if the active card is removed or fails
ON − active card operating normally
OFF − standby card operating normally
FW00225
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
6-25
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
68P09255A61-4
GLI3 Front Panel
Figure 6-3 shows the GLI3 front panel.
Figure 6-3: GLI3 Front Panel
LED
ALARM
OFF − operating normally
ON − briefly during power−up when the Alarm LED turns OFF
SLOW GREEN − when the GLI3 is INS (in−service)
Span
OFF − card is powered down, in initialization, or in standby
GREEN − operating normally
YELLOW − one or more of the equipped initialized spans is receiving
a remote alarm indication signal from the far end
RED − one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in an alarm
state
An RS−232, serial, asynchronous communications link for use as
an MMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to a maximum of
115,200 baud communications.
STATUS
OFF − operating normally
ON − briefly during power−up when the Alarm LED turns OFF
SLOW GREEN − when the GLI3 is INS (in−service)
ACTIVE
Shows the operating status of the redundant cards. The redundant
card toggles automatically if the active card is removed or fails
ON − active card operating normally
OFF − standby card operating normally
6-26
100BASE-T
Auxiliary Monitor
Port
Dual 100BASE-T
in a single RJ45
to Redundant
(Mate) GLI3
Reset Switch
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Span (LED)
Alarm (LED)
MMI Port
ACT
Pressing and releasing the switch resets all functions on the GLI3.
STA
RESET
100BASE-T to
BTS Packet Router
or Expansion cage
SPAN
Supports the cross−coupled ethernet circuits to the mate GLI using a
double crossover cable.
MMI
GLI
ALARM
RESET
Wired as an ethernet client for direct connection to a personal com−
puter with a standard ethernet cable. It allows connection of ethernet
;sniffer" when the ethernet switch is properly configured for port mon−
itoring.
GLI
AUX
AUX
Connects to either a BPR or expansion cage and is wired as an
ethernet client.
BPR B
BPR B
BPR A
BPR A
MMI
OPERATING STATUS
Connects to either a BPR or expansion cage and is wired as an
ethernet client.
Active (LED)
Status (LED)
ti-CDMA-WP-00064-v01-ildoc-ftw
Aug 2002
68P09255A61-4
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
BBX LED Status Combinations
PWR/ALM LED
The BBX module has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry that
controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.
The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED:
 Solid GREEN - INS_ACT no alarm
 Solid RED Red - initializing or power-up alarm
 Slowly Flashing GREEN - OOS_ROM no alarm
 Long RED/Short GREEN - OOS_ROM alarm
 Rapidly Flashing GREEN - OOS_RAM no alarm
 Short RED/Short GREEN - OOS_RAM alarm
 Long GREEN/Short RED - INS_ACT alarm
MCC LED Status Combinations
The MCC module has LED indicators and connectors as described
below (see Figure 6-4). Note that the figure does not show the
connectors as they are concealed by the removable lens.
The LED indicators and their states are as follows:
PWR/ALM LED
 RED - fault on module
ACTIVE LED
 Off - module is inactive, off-line, or not processing traffic.
 Slowly Flashing GREEN - OOS_ROM no alarm.
 Rapidly Flashing Green - OOS_RAM no alarm.
 Solid GREEN - module is INS_ACT, on-line, processing traffic.
PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDs
 Solid RED - module is powered but is in reset or the BCP is inactive.
MMI Connectors
 The RS-232 MMI port connector (four-pin) is intended to be used
primarily in the development or factory environment but may be used
in the field for debugging purposes.
 The RJ-11 ethernet port connector (eight-pin) is intended to be used
primarily in the development environment but may be used in the field
for high data rate debugging purposes.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
6-27
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
68P09255A61-4
Figure 6-4: MCC Front Panel
PWR/ALM
PWR/ALM LED
LED
COLOR
OFF − operating normally
ON − briefly during power−up and during failure
>conditions
An alarm is generated in the event of a failure
PWR/ALM
LENS
(REMOVABLE)
ACTIVE
RED
GREEN
RED
ACTIVE
ACTIVE LED
OPERATING STATUS
RAPIDLY BLINKING − Card is code−loaded but
>not enabled
SLOW BLINKING − Card is not code−loaded
ON − card is code−loaded and enabled
>(INS_ACTIVE)
ON − fault condition
SLOW FLASHING (alternating with green) − CHI
>bus inactive on power−up
FW00224
LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations
LPA Module LED
Each LPA module contains a bi-color LED just above the MMI
connector on the front panel of the module. Interpret this LED as
follows:
 GREEN — LPA module is active and is reporting no alarms (Normal
condition).
 Flashing GREEN/RED — LPA module is active but is reporting an
low input power condition. If no BBX is keyed, this is normal and
does not constitute a failure.
6-28
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Basic Troubleshooting - Span Control Link
68P09255A61-4
Basic Troubleshooting - Span Control Link
Span Problems (No Control Link)
Perform the procedure in Table 6-25 to troubleshoot a control link
failure.
Table 6-25: Troubleshoot Control Link Failure
 Step
Action
Connect the CDMA LMF computer to the MMI port on the applicable MGLI/GLI as shown in
Figure 6-5 or Figure 6-6.
Start an MMI communication session with the applicable MGLI/GLI by using the Windows
desktop shortcut icon.
Once the connection window opens, press the CDMA LMF computer Enter key until the GLI>
prompt is obtained.
At the GLI> prompt, enter:
config ni current  (equivalent of span view command)
The system will respond with a display similar to the following:
The frame format in flash
Equalization:
Span A - Default (0-131
Span B - Default (0-131
Span C - Default (0-131
Span D - Default (0-131
Span E - Default (0-131
Span F - Default (0-131
is set to use T1_2.
feet
feet
feet
feet
feet
feet
for
for
for
for
for
for
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
120
120
120
120
120
120
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
for
for
for
for
for
for
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
Linkspeed: Default (56K for T1 D4 AMI, 64K otherwise)
Currently, the link is running at the default rate
The actual rate is 0
NOTE
Defaults for span equalization are 0-131 feet for T1/J1 spans and 120 Ohm for E1.
Default linkspeed is 56K for T1 D4 AMI spans and 64K for all other types.
There is no need to change from defaults unless the OMC-R/CBSC span configuration requires it.
The span configurations loaded in the GLI must match those in the OMCR/CBSC database for the
BTS. If they do not, proceed to Table 6-26.
Repeat steps 1 through 5 for all remaining GLIs.
If the span settings are correct, verify the edlc parameters using the show command.
Any alarm conditions indicate that the span is not operating correctly.
 Try looping back the span line from the DSX panel back to the MM, and verify that the looped
signal is good.
 Listen for control tone on the appropriate timeslot from the Base Site and MM.
Exit the GLI MMI session and HyperTerminal connection by selecting File from the connection
window menu bar, and then Exit from the drop-down menu.
If no TCHs in groomed MCCs (or in whole C-CCP shelf) can process calls, verify that the ISB
cabling is correct and that ISB A and ISB B cables are not swapped.
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
6-29
Basic Troubleshooting - Span Control Link
68P09255A61-4
Figure 6-5: MGLI/GLI Board MMI Connection Detail
STATUS LED
RESET
Pushbutton
ALARM LED
GLI
SPANS LED
MASTER LED
To MMI port
MMI Port
Connector
ACTIVE LED
8-PIN
NULL MODEM
BOARD
(TRN9666A)
8-PIN TO 10-PIN
RS-232 CABLE
(P/N 30-09786R01)
CDMA LMF
COMPUTER
RS-232
CABLE
COM1 or COM2
DB9-T O-DB25
ADAPTER
ti-CDMA-WP-00079-v01-ildoc-ftw
6-30
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
Aug 2002
Basic Troubleshooting - Span Control Link
68P09255A61-4
Figure 6-6: GLI3 Board MMI Connection Detail
BPR A
BPR B
100BASE-T to
BTS Packet Router
or Expansion cage
AUX
100BASE-T
Auxiliary Monitor
Port
GLI
Dual 100BASE-T
in a single RJ45
to Redundant
(Mate) GLI3
Reset Switch
SPAN
Span (LED)
Alarm (LED)
MMI Port
MMI
To MMI port
ALARM
RESET
GLI3
ACT
STA
Active (LED)
Status (LED)
NULL MODEM
BOARD
(TRN9666A)
8-PIN
CDMA LMF
COMPUTER
8-PIN TO 10-PIN
RS-232 CABLE
(P/N 30-09786R01)
RS-232
CABLE
COM1 or COM2
DB9-T O-DB25
ADAPTER
REF ti-CDMA-WP-00064-v01-ildoc-ftw
Aug 2002
1X SC 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x
FIELD TRIAL
6-31
Basic Troubleshooting - Span Control Link
68P09255A61-4
Set BTS Site Span Configuration
Perform the procedure in Table 6-26 to set the span parameter
configuration.
NOTE
Perform the following procedure ONLY if span configurations
loaded in the MGLI/GLIs do not match those in the
OMCR/CBSC data base, AND ONLY when the exact
configuration data is available. Loading incorrect span
configuration data will render the site inoperable.
Table 6-26: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
 Step
Action
If not previously done, connect the CDMA LMF computer to the MMI port on the applicable
MGLI/GLI as shown in Figure 6-5.
If there is no MMI communication session in progress with the applicable MGLI/GLI, initiate one
by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon.
At the GLI> prompt, enter:
config ni format
Source Exif Data: 
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
Create Date                     : 2002:08:23 10:04:51
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Windows
Modify Date                     : 2002:09:30 21:48:28-05:00
Page Count                      : 366
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools
FCC ID Filing: IHET5CR1

Navigation menu